Tafsir LabMethodGitHubTürkçe

24. Sūrat al-Nūr

The Qurʾān · Sūra 24: al-Nūr · 64 verses · 52 sections

This commentary was written by Claude (Anthropic); it carries no religious authority and should be checked against the classical sources.

Jump to a verse

Sixty-four verses. Medinan. It takes its name from the expression ٱللَّهُ نُورُ ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتِ وَٱلْأَرْضِ in the thirty-fifth verse and from the parable of light built in that verse.

This sūra sets side by side two things whose standing together in the Qurʾān looks surprising at first: the rulings that govern the gravest accusations a society can make and the densest image of light in the Qurʾān. The first thirty-four verses of the sūra speak of things that must be covered, of things that must not be made public, of doors that are not entered without leave, of glances that are to be lowered. Then the thirty-fifth verse comes and lights a lamp.

This is the first thing that can be said about the sūra as a whole, and I record it as my own reading: Sūrat al-Nūr takes as its subject the difference between seeing and looking. The glance is lowered (30-31), the house is covered (27-29), an accusation is bound to four witnesses (4, 13), a thing heard is not carried in the mouth (15-16) — and in the middle of all these restrictions a light is lit. The sūra, that is, narrows man's power of sight while binding his capacity to see to something else.

The sūra is also unique in this commentary in another respect: it is the one place in the Qurʾān where a sūra names itself "sūra" (the first verse). I take this up in detail in the section below.

The name of the sūra — nūr

نُور — root ن-و-ر: light.

The analysis of the word was made at Nūḥ, 71/16; I rely on that treatment. The note there was this: nūr is light itself — what illuminates, what removes darkness; sirāj is the body that produces the light. The Qurʾān distributes these two words consistently and keeps the distinction.

From the same root:

WordSense
نُور (nūr)Light, brightness
نَار (nār)Fire
مُنِير (munīr)That which illuminates
مَنَارَة (manāra)The high place where a light is set — whence the English "minaret"
أَنَارَ / نَوَّرَTo illuminate

And there is a pair inside the root: nūr (light) and nār (fire) come from the same root. The difference between them is that fire both burns and gives light; light only gives light. The thirty-fifth verse will dwell on this distinction: there it will be said of the olive oil that "it would almost give light though no fire had touched it."

It should not be forgotten that the name was given later. The names of sūras are not the text's claim but the tradition's choice. But I can say that this choice is apt, and its ground stands in the text: the root nūr occurs in the sūra not only in the thirty-fifth verse but in the thirty-ninth and fortieth as well, and there it is named together with its opposite (wa man lam yajʿali'llāhu lahū nūran fa-mā lahū min nūr). The sūra's central word is thus built once within the sūra and once negated.

I record this as my own reading; the places of the words can be counted in the text.

Its being Medinan, and the historical frame

There is no disagreement that the sūra was revealed in the Medinan period, and the text itself supports this:

  • There is an order of rulings and an authority to apply them: penalties are commanded to a community (2, 4), the procedure of witness is regulated (4, 6-9, 13).
  • An accusation spreading within a community is on a scale that would shake the whole of it (11-20).
  • There are house doors, rooms, the hour of the midday rest, the coming and going of servants and of children (27-29, 58-59): a settled city life.
  • Around the Prophet there is an assembly where business is done in common, and an order of general mobilisation (62-63).
  • There is an anxiety about security and a promise of "safety after fear" (55).

I say nothing definite about which year the sūra belongs to. In the sources it is widely transmitted that it falls around the fifth or sixth year after the emigration; there is disagreement over the detail, and this commentary does not give datings it cannot establish. What can be said is that the sūra presupposes a settled Medinan society.

The structure of the sūra

The sūra consists of seven blocks. The boundaries of the blocks are marked by changes of address and by the calls yā ayyuhā'lladhīna āmanū.

BlockVersesSubjectThe sign that opens the blockKey words
I1The sūra's presentation of itselfSūratun anzalnāhāfaraḍnāhā, āyātin bayyināt
II2-10The penalties for adultery and for slander; witness; liʿānAl-zāniyatu wa'l-zānījalda, raʾfa, shuhadāʾ, shahādāt
III11-26The ifk: the spreading of an accusation, and its undoingInna'lladhīna jāʾū bi'l-ifkifk, ʿuṣba, talaqqī, shuyūʿ, buhtān
IV27-34House, leave to enter, the glance, covering, marriage and freedomYā ayyuhā'lladhīna āmanū lā tadkhulūistiʾnās, ghaḍḍu'l-baṣar, azkā, tūbū
V35-45The parable of light and its counter-parables; the witness of the universeAllāhu nūru'l-samāwāti wa'l-arḍmishkāt, sarāb, ẓulumāt, tasbīḥ
VI46-57The distance between word and deed; obedience; the promiseLaqad anzalnā āyātin mubayyinātmuʿriḍūn, samiʿnā wa aṭaʿnā, istikhlāf
VII58-64The manners of leave within the house, and the manners of common businessYā ayyuhā'lladhīna āmanū li-yastaʾdhinkumʿawrāt, ḥaraj, amrin jāmiʿ

The most striking thing about the structure is that the fourth block (27-34) stands immediately before the central verse (35), and the seventh block (58-64) at the end of the sūra. The matter of asking leave is taken up twice: once on entering a house from outside (27-29), once on passing from room to room within the house (58-59). Between them lies an entire section of light.

I record this as my own reading; the places of the verses stand in the text.

One half of the sūra covers, the other half uncovers

The weave of Sūrat al-Nūr is built upon a contrast, and this contrast can be verified from the text:

What is covered, closedWhat is opened, shown
Accusation — closed off by the condition of four witnesses (4, 13)The penalty — carried out in the open, with a group as witness (2)
What is heard — its being carried in the mouth is forbidden (15-16)The verses — mubayyināt: making clear, making plain (34, 46)
The house — not entered without leave (27-29)The mosques — raised up so that His name may be mentioned in them (36)
The glance — lowered (30-31)The lamp — lit (35)
Adornment — not displayed (31)The heavens and the earth — named with the light of God (35)

The left column restricts man's appetite for showing; the right column shows what is to be shown. The sūra does not only say "do not look" — it says "look here."

I record this reading as my own reading. Its ground is the places of the verses in the two columns.

A note of method: what is not done in this section

Sūrat al-Nūr is one of the sūras where this commentary's rules of style most need to be observed. I therefore write at the outset what is not done:

One. No legal ruling is issued. From the second, fourth, sixth and thirty-first verses of the sūra, broad discussions have arisen in classical jurisprudence. In this section the disagreements of those discussions are transmitted in tables, none is preferred, and none is binding. To decide about the practical application of a ruling is not the business of this text.

Two. No debate of criminal law is entered. Neither how the penalties are to be applied today, nor whether they are to be applied, nor the current controversies around them are the subject of this text. What is treated is the language of the verses: the roots of the words, the word order, the sequence.

Three. The reports about the ifk affair are not narrated. That the verses from eleven to twenty point to an event is plain, and in the sources that event is transmitted in detail. In this section no personal name is given, no discussion is entered about who was accused, and no details of the reports are transmitted. The reason is the verse itself: the text has not given the names of persons. In the twenty-sixth verse it says ulāʾika mubarraʾūna mimmā yaqūlūn — "they are free of what is said" — and the most correct thing this commentary can do is to stop where the verse stops. What will be treated is the frame the verses themselves give: how a report spreads, how language works, and how "thinking it a small thing" is diagnosed.

Four. No current politics and no current controversy is entered. How the fifty-fifth verse (the promise of istikhlāf) and the thirty-first (covering) are used in the controversies of today is not the subject of this text.

Five. The reader is not scolded. The subjects of this sūra — slander, gossip, the glance, privacy — are the subjects that have produced the most scolding in the language of preaching. This section does not do that.

The basmala

The word-by-word analysis of the basmala was made in the al-Fātiḥa section; I do not repeat it here. The numbering of the verses counts without the basmala.

One point particular to this sūra may be recorded: in the first verse of a text opened with the names al-Raḥmān and al-Raḥīm there stands the verb faraḍnāhā — "we cut and determined". This nearness between mercy and the drawing of a limit was recorded at the head of al-Ḥujurāt as well. In al-Nūr the relation is a step plainer: most of the limits laid down through the sūra are drawn around something that needs protecting — a person's standing, the inside of a house, the intimacy of a family.


24/1

سُورَةٌ أَنزَلْنَٰهَا وَفَرَضْنَٰهَا وَأَنزَلْنَا فِيهَآ ءَايَٰتٍۭ بَيِّنَٰتٍ لَّعَلَّكُمْ تَذَكَّرُونَ

Sūratun anzalnāhā wa faraḍnāhā wa anzalnā fīhā āyātin bayyinātin laʿallakum tadhakkarūn

"This is a sūra We have sent down and whose rulings We have determined precisely. In it We have sent down clear verses, that you may take heed."

The place in the Qurʾān where a sūra names itself "sūra"

This verse is one of the most striking openings in the Qurʾān in point of syntax, and the reason is this:

The Qurʾān uses the word sūra in many places. The addressees are asked to "bring a sūra like it" (al-Baqara 2/23, Yūnus 10/38); it is told what men did when a sūra was sent down (al-Tawba 9/64, 9/86, 9/124; Muḥammad 47/20). But in all these places the word points from outside at a text being spoken of.

Here, however, the sūra names itself. The subject of the sentence is the text itself: sūratun — "this is a sūra". And immediately after, two verbs come about that sūra: anzalnāhā (we sent it down) and faraḍnāhā (we determined it).

The explanations the lexicographers record about the root of the word diverge, and none is certain:

ExplanationRootGround
From a city wallس-و-رSūr — the wall that surrounds a city. A sūra too encloses a portion, sets its bounds.
From height, from a rankس-و-رSiwār — a bracelet; tasawwur — to climb up over. A sūra is a rank, a step.
From a remaining pieceس-أ-رSuʾr — what is left over of a thing. A sūra is a piece separated from a whole.

I prefer none of them, and none is binding. But what the three explanations have in common may be recorded: all three arrive at the idea of a "separated portion" — whether walled around, or set apart as a step, or broken off from a whole.

And this is directly connected with the verse's second verb.

وَفَرَضْنَٰهَا — to cut and determine

Root: ف-ر-ض. And the concrete sense of the root carries the whole weight of the verse.

The primary sense of the root: to notch, to cut a nick, to set a mark by cutting into an object. To cut the notch in which a bowstring will sit, to nick a measure into a rod — that is the verb.

This root was analysed at al-Baqara, 2/68 (lā fāriḍun wa lā bikr — in the description of the cow, in the sense "advanced in age"); the note there was this: fāriḍ, of an animal, means "past bearing, of a determined age", and from the same root come farḍ and farīḍa: an obligation determined precisely, with its limit drawn.

The derivatives of the root show how the concrete sense spread:

WordSenseIts link with the concrete core
فَرْض (farḍ)An obligation determined preciselyMarked by notching: its place is fixed
فَرِيضَة (farīḍa)A determined share, a determined amountA portion cut off and set apart
فَرْض (in a bow)The notch at the end of the bowThe root itself, directly
فِرَاضThe place where a thing has been cut, set apart
مَفْرُوضDetermined, set apart

And the Qurʾān uses this root in the division of inheritance and in the fixing of a dower: naṣīban mafrūḍan — "a determined share" (al-Nisāʾ 4/7); fa-niṣfu mā faraḍtum — "half of what you determined" (al-Baqara 2/237). In both places the word comes together with a number, a fraction, an amount.

So faraḍnāhā means this: what is inside this sūra was not left indefinite; its bounds were drawn, its shares were set apart, its measure was notched.

And this agrees exactly with the content of the sūra. In Sūrat al-Nūr there are rulings given with numbers: a hundred (2), eighty (4), four (4, 6, 8, 13), five (7, 9), three (58). Few other sūras in the Qurʾān carry so many numbers.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground can be counted: the root of the verb faraḍnāhā is "to notch and set a measure", and the sūra does in fact set measures.

A variant reading is transmitted in the sources: it is recorded that beside wa faraḍnāhā (undoubled) the word is also read with the consonant doubled. The doubled reading is Form II and conveys multiplicity, going into detail: "we determined it in detail", "we determined many rulings one by one". Since I cannot state with certainty which reader read which, I write no names; this is the practice adopted in this commentary. The two readings do not exclude one another: the one conveys the precision of the determining, the other its detail.

Two anzalnās: the frame the syntax builds

In the verse the verb anzalnā occurs twice, and its two objects differ:

ObjectWhat is said
The firstthe sūra itselfAnzalnāhā wa faraḍnāhā — we sent it down and determined it
The secondāyātin bayyinātthe verses within itAnzalnā fīhā — we sent down within it

The verse thus names the whole and the part separately: first the sūra as a unit, then what is in it, item by item.

This is the finest point of syntax in the verse, and it is worth recording. The text claims its own wholeness: this is not a set of scattered rulings brought together — it is a text sent down as a unit. And this claim is a ground for those who hold that the sūra really has a single weave.

I record this as my own reading; that the verb occurs twice and that its objects differ is the wording of the text.

ءَايَٰتٍۭ بَيِّنَٰتٍ — "clear verses"

بَيِّنَات — root ب-ي-ن. The root was treated in detail at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/6 (fa-tabayyanū); the note there was this: the concrete sense of the root is separation, the space between two things (bayn), and bayān is an operation of separating — separating what is mixed, making it distinguishable.

So bayyināt does not mean "easy verses" — it means "verses that distinguish". Verses that separate one thing from another, that make a boundary visible.

And the word will return three more times in the sūra: āyātin mubayyināt (34), āyātin mubayyināt (46), yubayyinu'llāhu lakumu'l-āyāt (58, 59, 61). The distribution of the root through the sūra shows how the sūra names its own work: separating.

That it comes indefinite is worth noting too: āyātin bayyinātin — "certain clear verses". There is no article. The rule the classical lexicographers record is that the indefinite here conveys magnification; I impose no preference.

لَّعَلَّكُمْ تَذَكَّرُونَ — the purpose

تَذَكَّرُونَ — root ذ-ك-ر, Form V: to try to remember, to call a thing back to one's own mind.

The choice of the form matters. The verse does not say taʿlamūn (that you may know), it says tadhakkarūn. Dhikr is the bringing back of what has been forgotten; not learning but remembering.

This says something, when the content of the sūra is considered. The subjects of Sūrat al-Nūr — guarding a person's standing, not spreading what one has heard, not entering without leave, lowering the glance — are none of them things man has never known. Instead of giving new knowledge, the verse speaks of calling back something known.

And the word will return in the twenty-seventh verse: dhālikum khayrun lakum laʿallakum tadhakkarūn — at the end of the manners of asking leave, the same verse-ending.

Context — a sūra opening with a heading

It is rare for a sūra in the Qurʾān to open in this way. Sūras generally begin with a group of letters, with an oath, with praise, with an address, or directly with the subject. Here there is a sentence of presentation: "this is such and such, it was done thus, and this is what for."

And the presentation prepares what comes immediately after. In the second verse a very heavy ruling will come. The first verse says in advance where that ruling comes from and what kind of thing it is: sent down and determined. Neither a custom men produced, then, nor a piece of advice open to interpretation.

I record this as an observation about the word order. Setting a frame before a heavy ruling is a structure seen also in the long legislative sections of al-Baqara: before the ruling, the nature of the ruling is stated.

What this says to the present

What this verse says to the present stands in the root of the second verb.

Faraḍnāhā — to notch, to set a measure. A thing's having a measure means that it is not without limit. And the whole subject of the sūra is the domains in which man of himself recognises no limit: speech, curiosity, the glance, accusation.

All of these, left to themselves, tend to grow. A word grows, a curiosity grows, an accusation grows. The sūra's first sentence cuts a notch into the growing.

And the last word of the verse says how this will work: tadhakkarūn — that you may remember. The limit, then, is laid down not as a barrier coming from outside but as a measure remembered from within.


24/2

ٱلزَّانِيَةُ وَٱلزَّانِى فَٱجْلِدُوا۟ كُلَّ وَٰحِدٍ مِّنْهُمَا مِا۟ئَةَ جَلْدَةٍ وَلَا تَأْخُذْكُم بِهِمَا رَأْفَةٌ فِى دِينِ ٱللَّهِ إِن كُنتُمْ تُؤْمِنُونَ بِٱللَّهِ وَٱلْيَوْمِ ٱلْءَاخِرِ وَلْيَشْهَدْ عَذَابَهُمَا طَآئِفَةٌ مِّنَ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ

Al-zāniyatu wa'l-zānī fa'jlidū kulla wāḥidin minhumā miʾata jalda, wa lā taʾkhudhkum bihimā raʾfatun fī dīni'llāhi in kuntum tuʾminūna bi'llāhi wa'l-yawmi'l-ākhir, wa'l-yashhad ʿadhābahumā ṭāʾifatun mina'l-muʾminīn

"The woman who commits adultery and the man who commits adultery — flog each of them a hundred strokes. And let no pity for them take hold of you in the religion of God, if you believe in God and in the Last Day. And let a group of the believers witness their punishment."

First, a note: what is not done in this section

This verse and those that follow gave rise to one of the broadest discussions in classical jurisprudence. In this section the disagreements of that discussion are transmitted, none is preferred, and none is binding. How the penalty is to be applied today, whether it is to be applied, and the current controversies around it are not the subject of this text.

What will be treated is the language of the verse: the roots of the words, their forms, their order, and the verse-ending.

The first observation on the word order: the woman first

The verse begins with al-zāniyatu — the feminine first.

This is not the usual order in the Qurʾān's verses of ruling. In the fourth verse the ruling on slander comes with alladhīna yarmūn (masculine plural); the ruling on theft at al-Māʾida 5/38 comes with al-sāriqu wa'l-sāriqa (the masculine first).

In the classical commentaries several explanations are given for this order:

ExplanationGround
Verse-ending and soundThe flow of the sentence and its agreement with the close of the verse
The weight in the ascription of the actThat the consequence of the act is more visible upon the woman
The relation of the order of the verses to the order of the subjectThat in the following verses, and in the sūra as a whole, it is the party slandered who is named

I prefer none of them, and none is binding. The one certain thing is that the order stands so in the text.

But an observation about the word order can be made, and I record it as my own reading: the verse names the two parties separately and equally, and then says the equality once more with kulla wāḥidin minhumā — "each of them". That the ruling is bound to both parties in the same measure is thus said three times: the two nouns, the dual pronoun (minhumā), and kulla wāḥidin.

فَٱجْلِدُوا۟ — the root ج-ل-د and the skin

Root: ج-ل-د. And the concrete sense of the root is directly the name of an organ.

جِلْد (jild) — skin. In Turkish the borrowed word cilt means both skin and the leather binding of a book, and from there a volume of a book as well — each part of a book bound in leather.

And the verb is derived from the noun: jaladato strike the skin. The literal sense of the verb, then, is not "to punish" but "to strike his skin".

The derivatives of the root:

WordSense
جِلْد (jild)Skin
جَلْدَة (jalda)A single stroke upon the skin
جَلَد (jalad)Endurance, hardness, the capacity to bear
جَلِيد (jalīd)Firm, enduring; and ice (water hardened)
تَجَلُّد (tajallud)To show fortitude, to bear up

The choice of the word is worth recording, and this is one of the most important points in the language of the verse.

In Arabic the general verb for striking is ḍaraba. The verse does not use it. The verb it uses carries in its own name where the stroke will reach: the skin.

In the classical juristic literature a conclusion has been drawn from this word, and I transmit it as it is transmitted: because the verb points to the skin, it has been said that the penalty must not go past the skin — that is, that the stroke must not maim or do lasting harm. Over the detail of the application — the force of the stroke, the kind of instrument, which parts of the body are to be avoided, the case of the sick and of the pregnant — there is broad disagreement among the schools, and none of it is given here as a ruling.

And the root's second cluster of senses stands in an interesting place: jalad — endurance; tajallud — fortitude. From the same root come both "to strike the skin" and "to bear up". The connection the lexicographers draw is this: the skin is the body's enduring layer — the first to meet what comes from outside, and the thing that protects what is within.

I record this as an observation about the root; I build no interpretation of the verse upon it.

مِا۟ئَةَ جَلْدَةٍ — the giving of a number

The verse gives a number: a hundred.

This is the direct counterpart of the verb faraḍnāhā in the first verse. The root ف-ر-ض — to notch, to set a measure. And here the notch is cut: a hundred.

The function of the number is a limit. The penalty is not left indefinite, not left to the discretion of the one who applies it. Not an upper limit but a fixed number is given.

And that the word jaldatan comes in the singular is worth noting: miʾata jalda — "a hundred one stroke". In Arabic the numbers from three to ten take a plural specifier; a hundred takes a singular one. This is a rule of grammar, not a subtlety; but its outcome is worth recording: in saying "a hundred strokes" the sentence leaves the word in the form of a single stroke.

وَلَا تَأْخُذْكُم بِهِمَا رَأْفَةٌ — the difference between raʾfa and raḥma

رَأْفَة — root ر-أ-ف. This root was analysed at al-Ḥashr, 59/10, and at al-Ḥadīd, 57/9; I rely on those treatments.

The note there was this, and it sits exactly here:

The lexicographers draw a distinction between raḥma and raʾfa: mercy is general and may sometimes contain severity (as a treatment that gives pain in order to heal a patient); raʾfa is the refusal to give pain at all, the refusal to hurt. The definition recorded in al-Ḥadīd is sharper still: raʾfa is above all the feeling of not being able to bear that another should be harmed.

And the verse's choice of word is built exactly upon this distinction.

Raḥma (ر-ح-م)Raʾfa (ر-أ-ف)
ScopeWide; the whole of the wish for another's goodNarrow; not bearing that pain be given
Can it contain severityYes — a treatment may give painNo — not to hurt at all
Its sourceWishing another's goodNot bearing the sight
In the verseNot forbiddenThis is what is forbidden

What the verse forbids is not mercy. What is forbidden is that raʾfa — the inability to bear witnessing pain — should stop the ruling.

And this distinction agrees with the language of the word elsewhere: the Qurʾān uses raʾfa positively of God and of the Prophet (al-Ḥadīd 57/9, al-Ḥashr 59/10, al-Tawba 9/128). The word, then, is not bad in itself. What is bad is its shifting a measure that has been laid down.

The form of the verb says this too: lā taʾkhudhkum — "let it not take hold of you, let it not seize you". Root أ-خ-ذ: to take, to hold, to seize. Raʾfa is thus pictured here as an agent: something that takes hold of a man and binds his hand.

The sentence does not say "do not pity". It says "let your pity not take hold of you". The feeling is not forbidden; the feeling's stopping the act is forbidden.

I record this distinction as my own reading; its ground is the form of the verb: akhadha — to take hold.

فِى دِينِ ٱللَّهِ — where the qualification stands

This is the part of the sentence most easily passed over: fī dīni'llāh — "in the religion of God".

The prohibition is not absolute but qualified. It is not said "show no pity anywhere": it is said where the application of a determined ruling is at issue.

And this qualification joins with faraḍnāhā in the first verse. What has been determined stays as the one who determined it determined it. Raʾfa is free in the domains not determined; in what has been determined it cannot alter the measure.

إِن كُنتُمْ تُؤْمِنُونَ بِٱللَّهِ وَٱلْيَوْمِ ٱلْءَاخِرِ — the position of the condition

The conditional clause is placed at a noteworthy point. Not after the command of a hundred strokes, but after the qualification that pity must not stop the ruling.

The condition, that is, is tied not to the carrying out of the penalty but to the feeling's not disturbing the measure.

And the particular naming of the Last Day carries a logic: the inability to bear that a ruling should give pain arises from a gaze that stays within this world. The mention of the hereafter lengthens the range of the gaze.

I record this as my own reading; the position of the condition and its content are the wording of the text.

وَلْيَشْهَدْ عَذَابَهُمَا طَآئِفَةٌ مِّنَ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ — the qualification of openness

طَآئِفَة — root ط-و-ف: to turn, to go round about a thing. Ṭawāf is from the same root. A ṭāʾifa is the group that goes round a place, that is present there. The word was analysed at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/9 (ṭāʾifatāni mina'l-muʾminīn); I rely on that treatment. The note there: the word states no number, it conveys an indefinite group; in the classical sources broad disagreement is transmitted about its minimum.

And the function of the command here needs dwelling on, because it appears to stand in tension with the sūra as a whole.

From beginning to end the sūra commands covering: do not enter without leave (27), lower your glance (30-31), do not spread what you have heard (15), bind an accusation to four witnesses (4). But here the very opposite is asked: that the penalty be seen.

The explanations widely transmitted in the classical commentaries about the purpose of this command are these:

ExplanationIts content
DeterrenceA penalty that is seen has more effect than one heard of
Oversight of the one who punishesThe application is not hidden but done before witnesses; the measure cannot be exceeded
The public declaring of the rulingThat the matter should not stay at the level of gossip but be closed

I impose no preference. But the second explanation's link with what precedes the verse may be recorded: the preceding clause regulated the feeling of the one who applies the penalty (raʾfa). The verse thus limits the applier both from softening and from exceeding the measure: the one by a condition, the other by a witness.

I record this as my own reading.

And there is one further detail in the wording: in saying "let them witness their punishment" the verse says ʿadhābahumā — "their punishment". The word jazāʾ or ḥadd is not used. The weight of the word is not softened.

The disagreements in classical jurisprudence — transmitted, not preferred

The juristic discussions arising from this verse are broad. The table below is meant to show the main divisions transmitted in the classical sources. None of them is this text's preference and none is binding. In the detail there are differences of view within each school as well.

QuestionThe main directions transmitted
The case of the married personThe great majority of the classical juristic tradition has set the ruling on the married person (muḥṣan) apart, grounding it on the sunna. Against this, views holding that the ruling is only the penalty in the verse are also transmitted in the history of Islamic thought, and this is a question debated in the works of theology and of legal theory.
Whether banishment (taghrīb) is to be addedSome jurists have said that a year's banishment is added to the flogging; others have counted this not a required additional penalty but a matter left to the ruler's discretion (taʿzīr). About women there has been further disagreement.
The way the offence is establishedFour witnesses, or confession. Broad disagreement is transmitted over the stringency of the conditions of witness and over whether a confession may be withdrawn.
The number of the group that is to witnessThere is more than one view about the least number the word ṭāʾifa conveys; different numbers, beginning from one, are transmitted in the sources.

This table is not a legal opinion and cannot be read as a guide to practice. The reason it is placed here is the method's rule about disagreement: the disagreement is not concealed, but no preference is imposed.

And one further thing must be recorded: the fourth verse comes immediately after this one and binds the accusation itself to a sanction. The sūra, that is, in laying down the penalty also closes the road that leads to it. This is the most important move in the sūra's arrangement, and it will be taken up in detail at the fourth verse.

What this says to the present

What this verse says to the present can be written without entering the debate about penalties and without scolding the reader; what is treated are the words.

One. The general logic of the raʾfa qualification.

The distinction the verse draws — the separating of feeling from measure — is a distinction that works outside the application of a ruling too. When a measure is laid down, what breaks it is most often not ill will but a momentary softening. The verse does not name this a bad thing; its name is raʾfa, and the word is used in the Qurʾān of God as well. All that is said is this: a measure that has been determined is not re-determined according to feeling.

Two. The witness qualification works in two directions.

A sanction applied in the open makes the one who applies it visible too. A penalty applied in secret is a penalty whose measure cannot be checked. The verse's ṭāʾifa qualification can be read for the side of it that secures this — and this reading agrees with what the sūra's later verses repeat: this sūra is from beginning to end about the checking of claims and of power.

Three. And a limit.

From this verse no conclusion follows that "nothing ought to remain hidden"; the rest of the sūra says exactly the reverse. The verse regulates what comes after a ruling has been given. The stage before the ruling — suspicion, accusation, gossip — will be closed off in the sternest terms in the sūra's later verses.


24/3

ٱلزَّانِى لَا يَنكِحُ إِلَّا زَانِيَةً أَوْ مُشْرِكَةً وَٱلزَّانِيَةُ لَا يَنكِحُهَآ إِلَّا زَانٍ أَوْ مُشْرِكٌ وَحُرِّمَ ذَٰلِكَ عَلَى ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ

Al-zānī lā yankiḥu illā zāniyatan aw mushrikatan wa'l-zāniyatu lā yankiḥuhā illā zānin aw mushrik, wa ḥurrima dhālika ʿala'l-muʾminīn

"The man who commits adultery marries none but a woman who commits adultery or a woman who associates; and the woman who commits adultery is married by none but a man who commits adultery or a man who associates. This has been forbidden to the believers."

The verse's place in point of order

In the second verse the order began with the woman; here it begins with the man. Two verses in succession, in two different orders.

This sets up a balance in the wording, and I record it as an observation: the pair of verses makes it hard to draw any superiority or precedence from which party is named first. The order changes between the two verses.

The disagreement over the kind of sentence

This verse is one of the places in the Qurʾān most disputed as to the kind of sentence it is, and the source of the disagreement is this: the sentence is built in the indicative, but at its end there stands a prohibiting clause (wa ḥurrima dhālika).

ReadingThe kind of sentenceIts sense
1A statement — the description of a state of affairsOne who does this act in fact comes together with such a person; the verse describes a fact
2A performative — a rulingThis is a prohibition of marriage, and the ḥurrima at the end says so
3A rebuke — a putting-downThe sentence is one of style, framed to devalue the act
4Belonging to a limited caseRevealed about a particular situation, and conveying no general ruling

This disagreement takes up wide space in the classical works of commentary and of jurisprudence. Among the schools too there is division over the marriage ruling drawn from this verse: some jurists have drawn a binding prohibition of marriage from it, while the majority have not taken it so and have explained the verse in another way.

I make no preference, I issue no legal ruling, and none of these is binding. I content myself with recording that the disagreement exists.

نَكَحَ — root ن-ك-ح

The sense the lexicographers record: one thing's joining with another, interlocking with it. Tanākaḥati'l-ashjār — the branches of the trees interlaced. The word is used both of the contract of marriage and of union, and occurs in the Qurʾān in both senses.

Which sense is meant in the verse is part of the disagreement above. That the word carries two senses is one of the reasons the sentence can be read in two ways.

The function of the verse in the arrangement

What the sentence does is to put both parties in the same scale.

The verse consists of two clauses, and the two are like each other's reflection in a mirror:

SubjectPredicateLimit
The firstal-zānīlā yankiḥuillā zāniyatan aw mushrikatan
The secondal-zāniyalā yankiḥuhāillā zānin aw mushrikun

The symmetry is exact. And the work of the symmetry becomes visible when it is read together with the sūra's later verses: in this sūra there is no burden laid on one side alone. In the second verse the penalty was bound equally to both parties; here the description is bound equally to both; in the sixth verse the oath of liʿān will be left equal in number for both.

I record this as my own reading; the symmetry itself is the wording of the text and can be counted.

A note on style

To use this verse as an instrument for ranking people runs against the sūra's own logic.

The reason lies within the sūra: the fourth verse is the verse that binds the naming of someone with this attribute — unless four witnesses are brought — to a penalty. The sūra, that is, takes as its addressee, one verse later, the man who picks up the language of the third verse and fastens it to a person.

This is the same measure recorded in al-Ḥujurāt: the text is an instrument of diagnosis, and the diagnosis is applied first to oneself.


24/4

وَٱلَّذِينَ يَرْمُونَ ٱلْمُحْصَنَٰتِ ثُمَّ لَمْ يَأْتُوا۟ بِأَرْبَعَةِ شُهَدَآءَ فَٱجْلِدُوهُمْ ثَمَٰنِينَ جَلْدَةً وَلَا تَقْبَلُوا۟ لَهُمْ شَهَٰدَةً أَبَدًا وَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ هُمُ ٱلْفَٰسِقُونَ

Wa'lladhīna yarmūna'l-muḥṣanāti thumma lam yaʾtū bi-arbaʿati shuhadāʾa fa'jlidūhum thamānīna jaldatan wa lā taqbalū lahum shahādatan abadā, wa ulāʾika humu'l-fāsiqūn

"And those who cast a charge at chaste women and then do not bring four witnesses — flog them eighty strokes, and never again accept any testimony from them. It is they who are the transgressors."

The most important point in the sūra's arrangement

The place of this verse explains the whole weave of Sūrat al-Nūr, and this is the observation about arrangement most dwelt on in this section.

The second verse laid down a penalty for an offence. The third framed a sentence about the parties to that offence. And the fourth bound the ascribing of that offence to someone to a penalty.

The order, then, is this:

VerseWhat is done
2A penalty is laid down for the act
3A sentence of ruling is framed about the act
4Ascribing the act to someone is bound to a penalty
5A door of repentance is opened to the one who ascribed it

The meaning of this order is this: immediately after forbidding an offence, the text forbids the use of that offence's name as a weapon.

And to see how unusual this is, it is enough to look at the general structure of legal texts. A penal norm generally defines the act and lays down its sanction. The binding of the accusation itself to a sanction is a further and a distinct step — because it takes as its subject the misuse of the penal order itself.

The balance the verse sets up is visible in the numbers too:

ActPenalty
Verse 2AdulteryA hundred strokes
Verse 4An unproved chargeEighty strokes

The penalty for slander, then, is four-fifths of the penalty for the act charged. The number is smaller — but it is on the same scale and of the same kind, and to it is added a permanent loss of a right (the rejection of testimony).

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the numbers themselves: the verse places an unproved accusation not as a light fault but as something comparable in weight with the offence itself.

And one further observation: in the second verse raʾfa (pity) was forbidden. In the fourth there is no such qualification. What comes in its place is the exception of repentance (5). The qualifications around the two rulings look in different directions: the one prevents the application from slackening, the other opens what comes after it has been applied.

يَرْمُونَ — to throw

Root: ر-م-ي. Its concrete sense is to throw, to hurl — a stone, an arrow, an object.

And this is the most concrete picture in the language of the verse. The verse does not say "they slander", "they lie", "they accuse". It says "they throw".

The derivatives of the root:

WordSense
رَمَىٰ (ramā)He threw, he hurled
رَمْي (ramy)A throwing
مِرْمَاةThe thing thrown; a target

The Qurʾān uses the same verb of an arrow and of a stone: wa mā ramayta idh ramayta wa lākinna'llāha ramā (al-Anfāl 8/17) — there too what is thrown is something concrete.

The picture carries three things, and all three are a description of slander:

1. What is thrown goes from a distance. The thrower does not touch the target; he strikes with a word. 2. What is thrown cannot be recalled. Once out of the hand, the thrower's control is over. 3. What is thrown leaves a mark. A sign stays where it struck.

And this picture goes on living in language: in English too one speaks of hurling an accusation, of slinging mud, of throwing dirt at a man. The same verb, the same picture. I record this as an observation about the language.

The verb's being used without a stated object is also worth noting: yarmūna'l-muḥṣanāt — "they throw at chaste women". What they throw is not said. In Arabic, when this verb is left absolute in such a context, the content of the charge is understood from the context. The text does not repeat the charge itself.

I record this as an observation about the word order, and I add this: the verse does not itself utter the words it forbids.

ٱلْمُحْصَنَٰت — those who are protected

Root: ح-ص-ن. This root was analysed at al-Ḥashr, 59/2 (ḥuṣūn — fortresses); I rely on that treatment. The definition there: to make firm, to take into protection, to make unreachable.

WordSense
حِصْن (ḥiṣn)A fortress — a place not entered from outside
مُحْصَن / مُحْصَنَةProtected, taken into protection
تَحْصِينThe making firm
حَصَانA chaste woman; and a horse of good breed

The choice of the word describes what slander does. A muḥṣana is, in the root of the word, one who is protected like a fortress. And slander is the throwing of something over that wall (yarmūna).

The picture the two words build together is this: the piercing of an area protected from within by something thrown from outside.

I record this as my own reading; the concrete senses of the two roots stand in the dictionary.

And this picture is the same as the picture recorded in al-Ḥujurāt. There, at 49/4, there were those who called out from behind the wall: the wall stood in its place but was crossed by a voice. Here too the fortress stands in its place but is crossed by a word thrown.

There is disagreement over the scope of the word, and it needs to be transmitted:

QuestionThe views transmitted
Whether the ruling covers men as wellThe verse uses the feminine plural. The great majority of the classical juristic tradition has counted the ruling valid for men too; language, analogy and context are given as grounds.
Which attributes muḥṣana coversBroad disagreement is transmitted over which of the conditions — marriage, freedom, chastity, sanity and majority, being Muslim — the word contains.

I transmit these as views that are transmitted; I make no preference, and none is binding.

بِأَرْبَعَةِ شُهَدَآءَ — four witnesses

Here is the heart of the verse, and its place in the arrangement must be recorded.

The condition is not to prove the slander — it is to prove the charge. The verse is built thus: yarmūna … thumma lam yaʾtū bi-arbaʿati shuhadāʾ. The penalty, that is, comes not because the charge has been proved false, but because the charge has not been proved true.

This shows where the burden of proof is placed: on the one who makes the claim.

And the particle thumma is worth noting. Not wa but thumma — "then". In Arabic this particle conveys that time has come in between. The one who throws the charge is thus given a span in which to bring his witnesses; the ruling is framed not immediately after the charge but after the chance of proof has gone unused.

I record this as an observation about the word order.

That the number is four: in no other matter does the Qurʾān require four witnesses. The general ruling on witness at al-Baqara, 2/282, is two men. This, then, is the heaviest condition of proof in the Qurʾān.

And the consequence of this weight is this, and it must be said openly: the condition is so heavy that in practice it makes proof all but impossible. In the classical works of jurisprudence this weight has been dwelt on separately, and the conditions of the witnessing (seeing the same event, at the same moment, in the same manner) have been kept extremely narrow.

In the classical sources a widespread conviction is transmitted that this is the result of an intention: the purpose of the ruling is that the act, so long as it stays hidden, should not be pursued and should not be brought before the community. I transmit this conviction as a view that is transmitted.

And the verses' own arrangement agrees with that conviction, and I record this as my own reading: the nineteenth verse will announce a heavy recompense for "those who love that indecency should spread among those who believe." The sūra, that is, holds a line that aims not at the act but at the publishing of the act, and the condition of four witnesses is the first link in that line.

فَٱجْلِدُوهُمْ ثَمَٰنِينَ جَلْدَةً — the penalty

The same root: ج-ل-د. The same verb as in the second verse, the same form, the same specifier.

The sūra's two penalties are expressed with the same word. This is a fact of the arrangement, and it shows this: the text places slander not as a separate category but as a violation of the same kind.

وَلَا تَقْبَلُوا۟ لَهُمْ شَهَٰدَةً أَبَدًا — the second sanction

This is the second and more lasting half of the penalty, and its logic stands within itself.

The man had come forward with a claim to have witnessed: he had said "I saw". And he could not support his claim with four witnesses. The result is the loss of the competence to bear witness.

The sanction, then, is chosen from the kind of the violation itself. The weight of the word of the man who has misused his word is taken away.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is that the word in the two clauses is from the same root: shuhadāʾ (witnesses) and shahādatan (testimony). The verse uses the same root in both the condition and the penalty.

أَبَدًا — "never, for ever". The word conveys that the sanction is without term. And the fifth verse will come directly upon this word.

وَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ هُمُ ٱلْفَٰسِقُونَ — the third sanction

فَاسِق — root ف-س-ق. This root was analysed in detail at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/6; I rely on that treatment. The note there was this: the concrete sense of the root is a date's coming out of its skin; fisq is not the name of a sin but the name of a position — a thing's being outside where it ought to be inside.

And the place of the word here forms a ring with the one in al-Ḥujurāt:

VerseWho is fāsiqWhat it does
al-Ḥujurāt 49/6The one who brings the reportA position that requires the report to be verified
al-Nūr 24/4The one who cannot prove the chargeA position in which the weight of his word is lost

The two verses look at the same matter with the same word: the carrier of an unverified word. al-Ḥujurāt regulated him from the side of the receiver (fa-tabayyanū — verify); al-Nūr regulates him from the side of the source.

I record this complementarity as my own reading, and at the end of the sūra I shall give in a separate table how the two sūras complete each other.

And the work the three sanctions do together:

SanctionWhat it touches
Eighty strokesThe body
The rejection of testimonySocial standing
The name fāsiqReligious standing

All three together reduce the weight in every domain of the man who uses his word without measure.

What this says to the present

One. That the accusation is itself an act.

The ground the verse lays down is this: to charge a man with something is an act. Not the expression of an opinion, not a guess, not a question. And because it is an act it has consequences.

This is the distinction most often lost in everyday speech. The man who puts a claim about most often sees himself only as "passing it on", "saying it", "conveying what he heard". The verse's verb does not recognise that position: yarmūn — they throw.

Two. Where the burden of proof lies.

The verse does not ask the accused to prove the charge false. It asks the accuser to prove the charge true.

This distinction points in the same direction as the logic of what is called in legal thought the presumption of innocence. This is not a claim of identity — what the verse builds is not a procedure of trial but a regulation of accusation. But what the two structures have in common is this: a claim that cannot be proved is not counted proved; and the maker of an unproved claim pays a price.

Three. The meaning of one qualification: abadā.

The permanent rejection of testimony looks very heavy at first. And it is heavy. But the fifth verse comes directly after and opens a door upon that weight. To read the two verses apart is to read both of them wrongly.


24/5

إِلَّا ٱلَّذِينَ تَابُوا۟ مِنۢ بَعْدِ ذَٰلِكَ وَأَصْلَحُوا۟ فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ غَفُورٌ رَّحِيمٌ

Illa'lladhīna tābū min baʿdi dhālika wa aṣlaḥū fa-inna'llāha ghafūrun raḥīm

"Except those who repent after that and set things right. God is truly forgiving, merciful."

What the exception attaches to — one of the most famous debates in legal theory

This short verse is the most cited example of a debate that has a name of its own in the Islamic tradition of legal theory: when an exception follows several clauses, does it apply to all of them or only to the last?

In the fourth verse there were three rulings:

1. Eighty strokes 2. That testimony is never to be accepted 3. The name fāsiq

And the fifth verse begins with illā. The question is: which of these does the exception apply to?

ViewWhat the exception applies toThe result
1Only to the last (the name fāsiq)The man who repents is not counted a fāsiq; but his testimony is still not accepted
2To the last two (testimony + fāsiq)The man who repents has both the name lifted and his testimony accepted

The first view is grounded on the rule that in Arabic an exception following clauses that come one after another applies to the nearest of them. The second is grounded on the rule that the exception applies to all the clauses, and appeal is also made to the general ruling on repentance.

This division is a question of legal theory over which the schools differ, and it is debated in the classical works of jurisprudence by way of this verse. In this section no preference is made, no legal ruling is issued, and none of these is binding.

But what the two views have in common may be recorded: both agree that the penalty itself (the eighty strokes) falls outside the scope of the exception. Repentance, that is, does not retroactively lift a sanction that has been laid down. Where they part is over whether the lasting part of the sanction is lifted.

Two verbs: تَابُوا۟ and أَصْلَحُوا۟

The condition of the verse is not one verb but two, and both are worth noting.

تَابَ — root ت-و-ب. Its concrete sense is to turn, to turn back. The word was taken up in al-Taḥrīm and at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/12. Tawba is to turn from one direction and pass into another; it is the name not of a feeling but of a movement.

أَصْلَحَ — root ص-ل-ح. The root was analysed at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/9-10; I rely on that treatment. The note there: iṣlāḥ is to repair what has been spoiled, to make it workable again. The word conveys not an intention but a work.

The coming of the two verbs together fixes the content of the condition:

VerbIts directionWhat it requires
tābūInward, upward — a turningA change of direction
aṣlaḥūOutward — repairThe setting right of what was spoiled

And without the second verb the first is not counted sufficient. This is the most concrete note in the verse's arrangement: slander has left a damage outside, and turning alone does not remove that damage.

In the classical works of jurisprudence it has been debated what this second verb means — whether it is retracting his word, or setting his own condition right, or remaining upon the straight road for a long time. I content myself with transmitting this disagreement; I make no preference.

The same pair occurred in al-Ḥujurāt too, in the discussion of repentance for backbiting, and a similar division was recorded there as well: in repenting for the violation of another's right, what is to become of the party violated.

مِنۢ بَعْدِ ذَٰلِكَ — "after that"

The demonstrative is worth noting: dhālika — "that". What it points to is not said openly: the slander, the penalty, or both at once?

In the classical commentaries all three possibilities are mentioned. The leaving of the reference indefinite leaves indefinite — that is, wide — the stage at which the door of repentance stands open.

I record this as an observation about the word order.

فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ غَفُورٌ رَّحِيمٌ — the choice of the verse-ending

The sūra's first verse-ending comes here, and it is a verse-ending of forgiveness.

The sūra had opened with two heavy penal rulings. The first pair of divine names comes after those rulings, and inside a note about repentance.

غَفُور — root غ-ف-ر: to cover. Mighfar is from the same root: what covers the head and protects it. The root's sense of "covering" was recorded in Muḥammad, where it was compared in a table with the other roots of covering.

And the word's place here is worth noting: immediately after penalising a man's laying bare another's fault, the sūra closes with the name of God that covers.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is that the root of the word ghafūr is "to cover" and that the subject of the verse is "laying bare". The two words stand face to face in the same pair of verses.

What this says to the present

One. A door set beside a permanent sanction.

The fourth verse said abadā — "never". The fifth says illā — "except". One verse later, a sanction without term is bound to a condition.

This has a general logic, and it may be recorded thus: the permanent identification of a man with a single fault is not absolute even within the order the text itself establishes. There is a sanction, it is heavy, and it has a door.

Two. And the condition of the door: not remorse alone, but repair.

The verse asks for two verbs. In today's terms this corresponds to something like this: to retract a claim is not the same thing as never to have put it about. The word has gone into circulation. The verse's second verb (aṣlaḥū) means the work to be done where the word left off.

Three. A limit: this verse is not an instrument for settling accounts.

To use the verse in order to measure whether another man's repentance is valid runs against the whole logic of the sūra. The verse binds the condition of the one who repents to God: fa-inna'llāha ghafūrun raḥīm.


24/6-7

وَٱلَّذِينَ يَرْمُونَ أَزْوَٰجَهُمْ وَلَمْ يَكُن لَّهُمْ شُهَدَآءُ إِلَّآ أَنفُسُهُمْ فَشَهَٰدَةُ أَحَدِهِمْ أَرْبَعُ شَهَٰدَٰتٍۭ بِٱللَّهِ إِنَّهُۥ لَمِنَ ٱلصَّٰدِقِينَ · وَٱلْخَٰمِسَةُ أَنَّ لَعْنَتَ ٱللَّهِ عَلَيْهِ إِن كَانَ مِنَ ٱلْكَٰذِبِينَ

Wa'lladhīna yarmūna azwājahum wa lam yakun lahum shuhadāʾu illā anfusuhum fa-shahādatu aḥadihim arbaʿu shahādātin bi'llāhi innahū la-mina'l-ṣādiqīn · Wa'l-khāmisatu anna laʿnata'llāhi ʿalayhi in kāna mina'l-kādhibīn

"And those who cast a charge at their wives and have no witnesses but themselves — the testimony of such a man is four testimonies sworn by God that he is of the truthful. And the fifth, that the curse of God be upon him if he is of the liars."

A note: only the structure and the language are treated here

Liʿān (لِعَان) is a subject of its own in classical jurisprudence, and there is broad disagreement among the schools about its consequences. In this section no juristic detail is entered into and no ruling is issued. What will be treated is the structure and the language of the verses.

The verse's link with the fourth

It opens with the same verb: yarmūn — they throw. The very verb of the fourth verse.

But the condition changes: in the fourth verse four witnesses were required; here there is the qualification wa lam yakun lahum shuhadāʾu illā anfusuhum — "if they have no witnesses but themselves".

24/424/6
Verbyarmūnyarmūn
Objectal-muḥṣanāt — generalazwājahumtheir wives
The way of proofFour witnessesFour oaths
If it cannot be provedEighty strokesThe other party swears too

The verse thus sets apart the one case in which the heavy condition of proof laid down in the fourth verse cannot be applied, and there it puts an oath in the place of a witness.

That the number is kept is worth noting: four. The number of witnesses was four; the number of oaths is four as well. The text does not change the weight required for proof — it changes only its kind.

I record this as an observation about the word order.

The structure itself: four plus one

The structure of liʿān is the same for both parties, and this symmetry is the most striking side of the verses:

The man (6-7)The woman (8-9)
Number of oathsFourFour
Their contentinnahū la-mina'l-ṣādiqīn — that he is of the truthfulinnahū la-mina'l-kādhibīn — that he is of the liars
The fifthlaʿnatu'llāhi ʿalayhthe curseghaḍabu'llāhi ʿalayhāthe anger
Its conditionin kāna mina'l-kādhibīnin kāna mina'l-ṣādiqīn

The symmetry is all but exact, and the only difference lies in the word of the fifth oath: laʿna and ghaḍab.

لَعْنَة — root ل-ع-ن: to drive away, to expel. A laʿna is a being driven far from mercy — at the centre of the word stands distance.

غَضَب — root غ-ض-ب: anger. At the centre of the word stands a turning towards.

The classical commentaries have met the difference between the two words with several explanations, and I prefer none of them:

ExplanationIts content
1There is no marked difference of degree between the two words in point of meaning; the verse-ending and the harmony of sound have been observed
2The words have to do with the difference in the position of the two parties
3Ghaḍab is counted the heavier, and this has to do with the second party's being the one who speaks last

These are transmitted explanations; I impose no preference, and none is binding.

فَشَهَٰدَةُ أَحَدِهِمْ أَرْبَعُ شَهَٰدَٰتٍ — a point of word order

The sentence does not say "let him swear four times". It says "his testimony is four testimonies".

The oath, that is, is named with the word shahāda. What was required in the fourth verse was shuhadāʾ (witnesses); what is required here is shahādāt (testimonies).

The same root, in two different forms: the one a person (four separate human beings), the other an act (four separate declarations).

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the form of the words: the text puts a man's own declaration in the place of four separate testimonies, and does so without changing the word. The oath is placed here not as an expression of feeling but as a procedural act.

What the verses do

What this regulation does is to rescue both parties from a deadlock.

The condition of the fourth verse — four witnesses — is in practice all but impossible for a husband. Had the condition been applied as it stands, two results would follow: either the claimant would receive eighty strokes for failing to prove his claim, or the claim could never be voiced at all.

The verse opens a third way: the claim is stated within a procedural frame, the other party answers within a procedural frame of the same weight, and the matter is closed by leaving the truth of the oaths to God.

Liʿān, then, is not a procedure of proof but a procedure of exit. Which of the two is telling the truth is not settled by a ruling.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is that the oaths of both parties are qualified by a conditional clause (in kāna) — that is, the text does not itself announce which of the two is telling the truth.

Over the juristic consequences — the state of the marriage, paternity, the possibility of coming together again, the ruling where one refuses to swear — there is broad disagreement among the schools. None of it is transmitted in this section and no ruling is issued.


24/8-9

وَيَدْرَؤُا۟ عَنْهَا ٱلْعَذَابَ أَن تَشْهَدَ أَرْبَعَ شَهَٰدَٰتٍۭ بِٱللَّهِ إِنَّهُۥ لَمِنَ ٱلْكَٰذِبِينَ · وَٱلْخَٰمِسَةَ أَنَّ غَضَبَ ٱللَّهِ عَلَيْهَآ إِن كَانَ مِنَ ٱلصَّٰدِقِينَ

Wa yadraʾu ʿanha'l-ʿadhāba an tashhada arbaʿa shahādātin bi'llāhi innahū la-mina'l-kādhibīn · Wa'l-khāmisata anna ghaḍaba'llāhi ʿalayhā in kāna mina'l-ṣādiqīn

"And it averts the punishment from her that she testify four testimonies sworn by God that he is of the liars. And the fifth, that the anger of God be upon her if he is of the truthful."

وَيَدْرَؤُا۟ — "it averts"

Root: د-ر-أ. Its concrete sense is to push, to thrust back, to repel. Daraʾa — to push a thing away. From the same root come dirʾ (in the sense of pushing) and tadāruʾ.

The choice of the verb is worth recording. The verse does not say "the woman too swears"; it says "it pushes the punishment away from her".

The work of the woman's oath, that is, is not to prove a claim — it is to thrust back something that is coming. The verb is chosen from the field of defence.

And this fixes the position the verse gives to the two parties:

PartyVerbIts direction
The one who chargesyarmūn (ر-م-ي)To throw — forward
The one chargedyadraʾu (د-ر-أ)To push — backward

The two verbs run in opposite directions, and both are physical. I record this as an observation about the language; the concrete senses of the two roots stand in the dictionary.

ٱلْعَذَاب — which punishment?

The verse does not say which punishment it means in saying "the punishment", and this is a point debated in classical jurisprudence. That debate is not entered in this section.

What can be recorded is a linguistic observation: the word is the same word as ʿadhābahumā in the second verse. The sūra names the punishment always with the same word.

وَٱلْخَٰمِسَةَ — a difference of case

The readings al-khāmisatu (nominative) in the seventh verse and al-khāmisata (accusative) in the ninth are recorded in the sources, and this difference between the two verses is taken up in the works on the variant readings.

That the difference does not change the meaning, and consists only in a choice of case within the construction of the sentence, is recorded in the classical sources. Since I cannot state with certainty which reader read which, I write no names.

The completion of the symmetry

The eighth and ninth verses repeat, word for word, the structure of the sixth and seventh. Only three things change: the subject, the word of the fifth oath (laʿna / ghaḍab), and the direction of the conditional clause.

This repetition is a wholeness rarely seen in the Qurʾān's verses of ruling, and by itself it says something: the procedural position of the two parties is one and the same.

I record this as an observation about the word order; the repetition itself is the wording of the text and can be compared.


24/10

وَلَوْلَا فَضْلُ ٱللَّهِ عَلَيْكُمْ وَرَحْمَتُهُۥ وَأَنَّ ٱللَّهَ تَوَّابٌ حَكِيمٌ

Wa law lā faḍlu'llāhi ʿalaykum wa raḥmatuhū wa anna'llāha tawwābun ḥakīm

"And were it not for God's bounty towards you and His mercy, and that God is ever-relenting, wise…"

A condition whose answer is not spoken

The most striking side of this verse is that the sentence is left unfinished.

Law lā — "were it not for" — is a particle of condition and calls for an answer: "were it not for it, such and such would be". But the answer is not spoken.

In Arabic this is called ḥadhf jawāb al-sharṭ, and the rule the lexicographers record is this: the omission of the answer conveys the answer's greatness and its unspeakableness. What is not said is heavier than what is said; the reader is asked to complete it himself.

And this pattern will be repeated four times in the sūra:

VerseExpressionThe answer
10Wa law lā faḍlu'llāhi ʿalaykum wa raḥmatuh…Not spoken
14Wa law lā faḍlu'llāhi ʿalaykum wa raḥmatuhū fi'l-dunyā wa'l-ākhira…La-massakum … ʿadhābun ʿaẓīmspoken
20Wa law lā faḍlu'llāhi ʿalaykum wa raḥmatuh…Not spoken
21Wa law lā faḍlu'llāhi ʿalaykum wa raḥmatuhū mā zakā minkum min aḥadin abadāSpoken

Four repetitions, balanced by two spoken and two unspoken answers. I record this as an observation about the word order; the places of the repetitions can be counted in the text.

The verse's place in the block

This verse is the close of the second block (2-10) and serves as a seal.

The block had opened with heavy rulings. The close names the quality standing behind those rulings: faḍl (bounty), raḥma, tawwāb, ḥakīm.

تَوَّاب — root ت-و-ب, an intensive form: He who accepts turnings again and again. That in Arabic the word can be used both of the servant and of God is worth noting: the servant "turns", God "accepts the turning" — the same verb, in two directions.

حَكِيم — root ح-ك-م: to judge; and the concrete sense of the root is the bit set in an animal's mouth (ḥakama), that is, to rein in. The root was named at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/8.

And the name's place here is worth noting: at the end of a block of rulings there comes a name from the root of ruling. The sūra seals the measures it has laid down with the name of the one who laid them.

The block as a whole (2-10)

VerseWhat is regulatedKey word
2A penalty for the actjalda, raʾfa, ṭāʾifa
3A sentence of ruling about the actnikāḥ
4A penalty for the chargeyarmūn, arbaʿa shuhadāʾ
5A door of repentance for the one who chargedtābū, aṣlaḥū
6-9A procedure of exit where proof is impossibleshahādāt, yadraʾu
10The sealfaḍl, raḥma, tawwāb, ḥakīm

The logic of the block is this, and I record it as my own reading: the text forbids an act, then forbids the use of that act's name as a weapon, then opens a way out for the one case in which proof is impossible, and at the end names repentance and mercy.

The block, then, is not a series of penalties — it is a series of limitations. What is limited, in order: the act, the charge, and the ruling itself.

And what comes after the block will show why this logic is built so tightly: in the eleventh verse it will be told how an accusation spreads within a community.


24/11

إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ جَآءُو بِٱلْإِفْكِ عُصْبَةٌ مِّنكُمْ لَا تَحْسَبُوهُ شَرًّا لَّكُم بَلْ هُوَ خَيْرٌ لَّكُمْ لِكُلِّ ٱمْرِئٍ مِّنْهُم مَّا ٱكْتَسَبَ مِنَ ٱلْإِثْمِ وَٱلَّذِى تَوَلَّىٰ كِبْرَهُۥ مِنْهُمْ لَهُۥ عَذَابٌ عَظِيمٌ

Inna'lladhīna jāʾū bi'l-ifki ʿuṣbatun minkum, lā taḥsabūhu sharran lakum, bal huwa khayrun lakum, li-kulli'mriʾin minhum ma'ktasaba mina'l-ithm, wa'lladhī tawallā kibrahū minhum lahū ʿadhābun ʿaẓīm

"Those who brought the ifk are a band from among you. Do not think it an evil for you; rather it is a good for you. For each man among them is what he earned of the sin. And for the one among them who took upon himself the greater part of it there is a great punishment."

First, a note: what is not narrated in this section

The verses from eleven to twenty point to an event that is transmitted in detail in the sources.

In this section the details of the reports about that event are not transmitted, no personal name is given, and no discussion is entered about who was accused.

The reason has two layers, and it needs to be written openly:

One. The verses themselves give no name. Alladhīna jāʾū — "those who brought". ʿUṣbatun minkum — "a band from among you". Alladhī tawallā kibrahū — "the one who took upon himself the greater part of it". The text is nameless from beginning to end. And the namelessness stands here not as a lack but as a choice: the verses close the matter in the twenty-sixth by saying ulāʾika mubarraʾūna mimmā yaqūlūn — "they are free of what is said".

Two. This commentary's general practice. The reports around an event diverge from one another at the level of detail; and, more importantly, this sūra itself takes as its subject what it is to speak about named persons. For a section to be written by doing the very thing the verse it treats forbids would be an inconsistency.

What will be treated is the frame the verses themselves give: how a report spreads, how language works, and how "thinking it a small thing" is diagnosed.

ٱلْإِفْك — root أ-ف-ك

The root was analysed at al-Aḥqāf, 46/11 and 46/28, and also at al-ʿAnkabūt, 29/17 and 29/61; I rely on those treatments.

The note there was this: the concrete sense of the root is to turn a thing from its direction, to turn it inside out. As was recorded in al-Aḥqāf: "the word used for 'fabrication' means 'turned about'." In al-ʿAnkabūt the root's use in two directions was given in a table: takhluqūna ifkā (active — they fabricate) and fa-annā yuʾfakūn (passive — they are turned about). The sentence there was this: "what they fabricate becomes in the end the thing that turns them about."

And the choice of the word here uses exactly the picture this root carries.

The verse does not say kadhib (a lie). The word buhtān will come in the sixteenth verse, but not here. The word used here is ifk: the thing turned about.

The difference is this:

WordRootWhat it conveys
كَذِب (kadhib)ك-ذ-بA word that does not answer to the truth
إِفْك (ifk)أ-ف-كWhat has been turned about — its direction reversed
بُهْتَان (buhtān)ب-ه-تA slander that leaves the hearer stunned

Ifk is not the fabricating of a thing out of nothing — it is the turning inside out of something that exists. That is the picture in the root: the bottom goes on top, the front to the back.

And this picture describes how slander works. A slander is generally not built from nothing; it is built by turning the direction of real material. An event happened, a person was seen somewhere, a word was said — and their direction is reversed.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the concrete sense of the root, and that sense was recorded independently in al-Aḥqāf.

عُصْبَة — a band bound together

Root: ع-ص-ب. Its concrete sense is to bind tightly, to wrap.

WordSense
عَصَبَ (ʿaṣaba)He bound tightly, he wrapped
عَصَب (ʿaṣab)Nerve, sinew — the fibre that binds the body
عِصَابَة (ʿiṣāba)A cloth wound round the head; and a group standing together
عَصَبِيَّة (ʿaṣabiyya)Blind attachment to a group — the word English has taken over as "asabiyya"
عُصْبَة (ʿuṣba)A band bound to one another

The choice of the word is one of the verse's most important diagnoses.

The verse does not say qawm (a people), farīq (a party), nās (people) or ṭāʾifa (a group). It says ʿuṣba: those bound to one another.

The spreading of a report, that is, is described not as the independent movement of scattered individuals but as the movement of a bound band.

The idea of "binding" in the root of the word tells the social mechanics of slander, and I record this as my own reading: an accusation does not spread on its own. Among the people who carry it there is already a bond — a common circle, a common enmity, a common expectation. And the report flows along that bond.

Moreover the same root gives the word ʿaṣabiyya, and this word conveys the taking as one's measure not a man's truthfulness but whether he is on one's own side. Since the two words are from the same root, I record this as an observation about the root and draw no ruling from it.

مِّنكُمْ — "from among you"

This is the heaviest word in the verse, and it consists of two letters.

Those who brought the slander are not from outside but from within. And this is exactly the measure recorded in al-Ḥujurāt: there too the behaviours corrected were the behaviours of those who believe, and the address was turned inward upon them.

This word settles from the outset how the verses are to be read. To take up the section and use it to describe an outside group is to turn the direction of the address on its head.

لَا تَحْسَبُوهُ شَرًّا لَّكُم بَلْ هُوَ خَيْرٌ لَّكُمْ — an unlooked-for sentence

Here is the most unlooked-for place in the verse's arrangement.

A slander that shakes a community is spoken of, and the text says this: "do not think it an evil for you; rather it is a good for you."

Three notes must be entered so that the sentence is not misunderstood:

One. The sentence does not declare the slander a good thing. At the end of the same verse it says ʿadhābun ʿaẓīm of those who spread it; in the nineteenth verse ʿadhābun alīm, in the twenty-third luʿinū fi'l-dunyā wa'l-ākhira. The ruling about the act is of the utmost severity.

Two. To whom does the pronoun lakum refer? The one addressed is not those who brought the slander — it is the whole of the community. By saying lā taḥsabūhu (a plural imperative) the verse opens the address to the community.

Three. What is the "good"? The verse does not say; but the following verses give an answer: the whole of the verses from twelve to twenty is a lesson in method drawn from this event. What is "good", then, is not the event itself — it is the measure that comes after the event.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the arrangement of the sūra: had the verses only meant to record an event, the verses from twelve to eighteen would not have been needed. The whole of those verses builds a method.

And one further observation: a similar sentence structure occurs at al-Baqara, 2/216wa ʿasā an takrahū shayʾan wa huwa khayrun lakum. The two verses do the same work: the ruling upon an event is separated from the outcome of that event.

لِكُلِّ ٱمْرِئٍ مِّنْهُم مَّا ٱكْتَسَبَ مِنَ ٱلْإِثْمِ — the dividing of shares

This clause divides the responsibility within a group among individuals, and it is one of the places in the verse that must be read most carefully.

At the head of the eleventh verse a group had been described (ʿuṣbatun). And now the verse binds each person within that group separately to account: li-kulli'mriʾin minhum — "for every man among them".

The group, that is, does not dissolve responsibility. A thing's being done in company does not free a man of his own share.

ٱكْتَسَبَ — root ك-س-ب, Form VIII. The root was recorded in al-Shūrā. And the difference of form is a point the classical lexicographers dwell on:

FormVerbThe tendency the lexicographers record
TriliteralkasabaEarning in general
Form VIIIiktasabaEarning that involves effort and intent

I give this distinction as a tendency the lexicographers record; that it is not an absolute rule is also stated in the sources. But that the form in the verse is Form VIII is worth recording: the carrying of a report is placed as something a man does by his own effort.

وَٱلَّذِى تَوَلَّىٰ كِبْرَهُۥ — "the one who took upon himself the greater part"

The verse sets up a difference of degree within the group.

تَوَلَّىٰ — root و-ل-ي: to be near, to take upon oneself, to take a matter in hand. A walī is one who takes a matter in hand; a wālī is one who governs. Here the sense is: the one who takes upon himself the largest part of a business.

كِبْر — root ك-ب-ر: greatness. Two readings of the word are recorded in the sources: kibrahū and kubrahū. Both mean "the greatest share of it"; the difference is in the form. Since I cannot state with certainty which reader read which, I write no names.

And the correspondence of this difference of degree in the arrangement is this:

WhoWhat he receives
Every member of the groupma'ktasaba mina'l-ithmas much as he earned
The one who took upon himself the greater partʿadhābun ʿaẓīma great punishment

The verse thus does two things at once: it exempts no one from responsibility, but neither does it put everyone in the same place.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is that the two clauses stand side by side. And I add this: this is the distinction most often lost when a report spreads. The one who first says a word, the one who carries it insistently, the one who repeats it once and the one who listens in silence do not stand in the same place — but none of them is entirely outside it either.


24/12

لَّوْلَآ إِذْ سَمِعْتُمُوهُ ظَنَّ ٱلْمُؤْمِنُونَ وَٱلْمُؤْمِنَٰتُ بِأَنفُسِهِمْ خَيْرًا وَقَالُوا۟ هَٰذَآ إِفْكٌ مُّبِينٌ

Law lā idh samiʿtumūhu ẓanna'l-muʾminūna wa'l-muʾminātu bi-anfusihim khayran wa qālū hādhā ifkun mubīn

"When you heard it, ought not the believing men and the believing women to have thought well of their own, and to have said: 'This is a plain slander'?"

لَوْلَا — the particle of reproach

In Arabic law lā is used in two distinct functions, and the two must be kept apart:

FunctionWhat follows itSense
Condition (law lā imtināʿiyya)A nominal clause"were it not for…" — in verses 10, 14, 20, 21
Reproach, urging (law lā taḥḍīḍiyya)A verbal clause"ought you not to have…?" — here and in verses 13 and 16

And the second function, used of a past act, conveys a reproach: you did not do what you ought to have done.

The particle occurs seven times in the sūra and divides in two:

Reproach (law lā + verb)Condition (law lā + noun)
12 — ought you not to have thought well10 — were it not for God's bounty
13 — ought they not to have brought four witnesses14 — were it not for God's bounty
16 — ought you not to have said "it is not for us to speak of this"20 — were it not for God's bounty
21 — were it not for God's bounty

Three reproaches and four conditions, interlocked. And the two series run in and out of each other: 10 (condition) → 12, 13 (reproach) → 14 (condition) → 16 (reproach) → 20, 21 (condition).

I record this as an observation about the word order; the places of the particle can be counted in the text. And what the structure does is this: beside every reproach a note of bounty is set. The text reproaches, but does not leave the reproach alone.

إِذْ سَمِعْتُمُوهُ — "when you heard it"

The note of time is worth remarking: idh samiʿtumūh — "the moment you heard it".

The verse binds what ought to have been done to a moment: the first instant the report reaches the ear.

And this is exactly where the variant reading at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/6, looks. There the two readings were given in a table: fa-tabayyanū (verify) and fa-tathabbatū (hold your ground). And the note there was this: tathabbut is the precondition of tabayyun — verifying takes time, and to gain time one must halt.

al-Nūr 24/12 says what is to be done in that moment of halting.

ظَنَّبِأَنفُسِهِمْ خَيْرًا — "to think well of their own"

This is the expression in the verse that most needs dwelling on, and it carries a difficulty of translation.

Literally: "let the believing men and the believing women think good about their own selves".

And there are two readings of what bi-anfusihim means:

ReadingTo whom anfusihim refersThe sense of the clause
1To one another — "themselves" means the members of the community"Ought you not to have thought well of one another?"
2To their own selves — each member about his own side"Ought you not to have thought of your own community as of yourself?"

The two readings do not exclude one another, and both are transmitted in the classical commentaries. I impose no preference.

But what the two readings have in common is what gives the expression its force: the word anfus puts one believer's judgement about another in the same place as his judgement about himself.

And this pattern occurred exactly so at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/11: wa lā talmizū anfusakum — "do not find fault with yourselves". The note there was this, and it sits here exactly: that the object chosen is anfusakum means that the one found fault with is named not "the others" but "yourselves".

The two sūras use the same word for the same work:

VerseExpressionWhat it does
al-Ḥujurāt 49/11lā talmizū anfusakumIt counts the fault-finding as done to oneself
al-Nūr 24/12ẓanna … bi-anfusihim khayrāIt counts the good opinion as held about oneself
al-Nūr 24/61fa-sallimū ʿalā anfusikumIt counts the greeting as given to oneself

The same word in three verses, with three different verbs. This is a fact of the arrangement and can be counted.

"Ought you not to have…?" — the form of the command

The most striking side of the verse is how it frames its command.

The verse does not say:

  • "Verify the report you have heard"
  • "Do not spread it"
  • "Be silent"

It says: ought you not to have thought well and said, "this is a plain slander"?

What is asked, then, is not a passive silence but a judgement. There are two verbs: ẓanna (to think) and qālū (to say). The one within, the other without.

VerbWhereWhat
ẓanna … khayrāWithinTo frame a good opinion
qālū hādhā ifkun mubīnWithoutTo say it

And the order is worth noting: first the inside, then the outside. The word comes as the uttering of an opinion already framed.

I record this as my own reading, and I ground it on the chain at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/12. There the chain was built thus: suspicion → prying → backbiting, three steps growing from inside outward. And what was recorded there was this: "The prohibition does not begin with backbiting. It begins with suspicion — that is, where no one can see, and where no harm has yet come to be."

al-Nūr 24/12 builds the positive counterpart of the same chain:

al-Ḥujurāt 49/12 — the forbidden chainal-Nūr 24/12 — the chain that is asked for
First stepal-ẓann — ill opinion (in the mind)ẓanna … khayrā — good opinion (in the mind)
Second steplā tajassasū — prying(no prying is needed)
Third steplā yaghtab — spreading on the tongueqālū hādhā ifkun mubīnrefusal on the tongue

The two verses show two directions of the same mechanism. al-Ḥujurāt cuts the chain at its very beginning; al-Nūr builds a counter-chain in the same place.

I record this comparison as my own reading; the order of the steps in the two verses stands in the text and can be compared.

هَٰذَآ إِفْكٌ مُّبِينٌ — the sentence that is to be said

مُبِين — root ب-ي-ن, the active participle of Form IV: what is clear; and what makes clear. In Arabic the word can be understood both intransitively and transitively.

And this is the same root as āyātin bayyināt in the first verse. The sūra had presented its own verses as bayyināt (distinguishing); here the believers are asked to say of a report that it is mubīn (plain).

The text, that is, hands the addressee the very word of measure it uses of itself. I record this as an observation about the root.

And the definiteness of the sentence is worth noting. The verse does not say "perhaps it is not true", "let us not be sure", "let us wait". It asks for a sentence of judgement: hādhā ifkun mubīn.

At first sight this may look to stand in tension with the command of tabayyun (verify) at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/6. But the two commands look at different situations, and the difference must be recorded:

al-Ḥujurāt 49/6al-Nūr 24/12
The subject of the reportThe act of a community — public, verifiableThe privacy of a person — its verification bound to four witnesses
What is commandedTabayyun — verifyReject it
The reasonThe report may be true and may call for actionWithout four witnesses the report already has no standing (24/13)

The two verses do not contradict one another; what fixes the difference between them is the condition of proof that will be stated in the thirteenth verse. If a report, by definition, is not held to exist in law unless it is proved by four witnesses, then there is no "verifying" to be done about it either.

I record this distinction as my own reading; its ground is the wording of 24/13.

What this says to the present

One. The question of the default position.

What the verse builds is not a counsel of "thinking positively". What it builds is a default position: when a report arrives, the mind of the one who receives it is not a blank page — it starts from somewhere. The verse fixes that starting point.

And the practical consequence is this: to say "who knows?" in the face of a claim is in fact not a neutral position. It is to let the claim take room in the mind without carrying its burden of proof.

Two. That silence is not enough.

The verse does not command silence; it commands the saying of a sentence. This is a concrete distinction that comes out of the arrangement.

When a report is spreading, those who do not carry it but do not oppose it either do not slow the speed of its spread. What the verse asks for is the breaking of the chain — and a chain is broken not by the links staying still but by one of them changing direction.

Three. And a limit.

This verse does not mean that no claim is ever to be taken seriously. The sūra itself has built a procedure of proof (4, 6-9, 13). What the verse closes off is the claim that circulates outside the procedure of proof — the one that goes about not in court but in the mouth.


24/13

لَّوْلَا جَآءُو عَلَيْهِ بِأَرْبَعَةِ شُهَدَآءَ فَإِذْ لَمْ يَأْتُوا۟ بِٱلشُّهَدَآءِ فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ عِندَ ٱللَّهِ هُمُ ٱلْكَٰذِبُونَ

Law lā jāʾū ʿalayhi bi-arbaʿati shuhadāʾ, fa-idh lam yaʾtū bi'l-shuhadāʾi fa-ulāʾika ʿinda'llāhi humu'l-kādhibūn

"Ought they not to have brought four witnesses to it? Since they did not bring the witnesses, it is they who, in God's sight, are the liars."

The fourth verse returns into the arrangement

The verse repeats the condition of the fourth verse exactly as it stood: arbaʿati shuhadāʾ.

And the place of the repetition is worth noting: the fourth verse had laid down a ruling; the thirteenth applies that ruling to an event. The sūra, that is, works the rule it has laid down upon the case it has itself recounted.

I record this as an observation about the word order; the identity of the expression in the two verses is the wording of the text.

فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ عِندَ ٱللَّهِ هُمُ ٱلْكَٰذِبُونَ — "in God's sight"

Here is the qualification in the sentence that must be read most carefully: ʿinda'llāh — "in God's sight".

The verse identifies the failure to prove with lying. But it does so with the qualification ʿinda'llāh.

In the classical commentaries the function of this qualification has been dwelt on, and the explanations transmitted are these:

ExplanationIts content
1The qualification conveys that the ruling is given not on the legal plane but on the divine one
2The qualification does not exclude the possibility that the word is in fact true, and yet conveys that the ruling is framed so
3The qualification reinforces the certainty of the ruling: "in God's sight" — that is, truly

I impose no preference, and none is binding.

But what lies beneath all three explanations is the same, and I record it as my own reading: an unproved claim, even if it is true, has the standing of a lie from the moment it goes into circulation. For no one who hears it has anything in hand with which to verify it.

This is the sharpest statement of the matter of the burden of proof recorded at the fourth verse. The verse does not say "they lied" — it says "they are liars"; that is, it states a position. And what fixes the position is not the content of the claim but the absence of its proof.

فَإِذْ — "since"

The particle is worth noting: fa-idh — "since, given that".

The sentence draws a conclusion. And the manner of the drawing is logical: a condition had been laid down (four witnesses), the condition was not met, the ruling followed.

This is the working of the verb faraḍnāhā in the sūra's first verse. A measure had been notched; the measure is applied.


24/14

وَلَوْلَا فَضْلُ ٱللَّهِ عَلَيْكُمْ وَرَحْمَتُهُۥ فِى ٱلدُّنْيَا وَٱلْءَاخِرَةِ لَمَسَّكُمْ فِى مَآ أَفَضْتُمْ فِيهِ عَذَابٌ عَظِيمٌ

Wa law lā faḍlu'llāhi ʿalaykum wa raḥmatuhū fi'l-dunyā wa'l-ākhirati la-massakum fī mā afaḍtum fīhi ʿadhābun ʿaẓīm

"Were it not for God's bounty towards you and His mercy in this world and in the hereafter, a great punishment would have touched you for what you plunged into."

أَفَضْتُمْ — "you plunged into it"

Root: ف-ي-ض. And the concrete sense of the root is one of the most striking word-pictures in this section.

Fāḍa — a vessel's overflowing, water's going over the brim and spreading. Fayḍ — an overflowing, abundance. Ifāḍa — to make overflow, to pour out.

And the Qurʾān uses this verb in the setting of the pilgrimage: fa-idhā afaḍtum min ʿArafāt (al-Baqara 2/198) — "when you pour out from ʿArafāt". What is described there is a great crowd's pouring from one place to another.

The use of the word here is a verb of water chosen for a word:

WordIts concrete picture
فَاضَA vessel's overflowing
إِفَاضَةMaking overflow; a crowd's pouring out
فَيْضFlood, abundance

The verse, that is, describes the spreading of a report as an overflowing.

And this picture carries three things, which I record as my own reading:

1. What overflows has passed the vessel's bound. A word has gone outside the place it belonged to. 2. An overflow cannot be steered. Water that has spilled does not go by a road the spiller has fixed; it finds its own way. 3. An overflow is the act of a crowd. A drop does not overflow; a mass does.

And that the verb comes in Form IV rather than Form V is worth noting: afāḍa — transitive. The verse names its addressees not as the water that overflows but as those who made it overflow. The word did not spread of itself; it is not told as "it spread" — it is said, you made it overflow.

This agrees with the whole logic of the sūra: talaqqawnahū bi-alsinatikum in the fifteenth verse, yuḥibbūna an tashīʿa in the nineteenth. In all three verses the spreading is set down not as a passive occurrence but as an act.

فِى ٱلدُّنْيَا وَٱلْءَاخِرَةِ — where the qualification stands

There is a grammatical point in the verse, debated in the classical commentaries: what does the phrase fi'l-dunyā wa'l-ākhira attach to?

ReadingWhat it attaches toIts sense
1To faḍl and raḥma"His bounty and His mercy in this world and in the hereafter"
2To ʿadhābun ʿaẓīm"a punishment would have touched you in this world and in the hereafter"

Both readings are transmitted in the classical sources; I impose no preference, and neither is binding.

But the first reading's agreement with the position in the sentence may be recorded: the phrase comes immediately after faḍl and raḥma. I give this as an observation about the word order, not as a preference.

مَسَّ — "to touch"

Root: م-س-س. Its concrete sense is to touch, to make contact — the lightest contact.

And the choice of the verb is not a softening but a sharpening. The verse does not say la-nazala ʿalaykum (it would have come down upon you) or la-akhadhakum (it would have seized you). It says "it would have touched you" — and what touches is described as ʿaẓīm.

Only the grazing of the thing described as "great", then, is at issue.

I record this as an observation about the style. The same verb will return in the thirty-fifth verse: wa law lam tamsashu nār — "though no fire had touched it". In both places the same verb, in the same sense of the lightest contact.


24/15

إِذْ تَلَقَّوْنَهُۥ بِأَلْسِنَتِكُمْ وَتَقُولُونَ بِأَفْوَاهِكُم مَّا لَيْسَ لَكُم بِهِۦ عِلْمٌ وَتَحْسَبُونَهُۥ هَيِّنًا وَهُوَ عِندَ ٱللَّهِ عَظِيمٌ

Idh talaqqawnahū bi-alsinatikum wa taqūlūna bi-afwāhikum mā laysa lakum bihī ʿilmun wa taḥsabūnahū hayyinan wa huwa ʿinda'llāhi ʿaẓīm

"When you were taking it up on your tongues, and saying with your mouths what you had no knowledge of, and thinking it a small thing — while in God's sight it is great."

One of the densest sentences in the sūra

This verse describes the mechanics by which a report spreads in four verbs, and each of the four does a distinct work in the arrangement:

OrderVerbWhereWhat it does
1talaqqawnahūThe tongueTaking up, taking over the report
2taqūlūnaThe mouthSaying the report
3mā laysa lakum bihī ʿilmKnowledgeThe note that there is nothing in hand
4taḥsabūnahū hayyināAppraisalThinking it a small thing

The four steps build a chain, and the last link of the chain is the cause of the others. I take this up at the end of the verse.

تَلَقَّوْنَهُۥ بِأَلْسِنَتِكُمْ — taking it up from tongue to tongue

Root: ل-ق-ي. Its concrete sense is to meet, to encounter, to come upon a thing. Liqāʾ — a meeting. Talaqqī (Form V) — to receive, to take up and make one's own, to take over.

The Qurʾān uses the same form elsewhere: fa-talaqqā Ādamu min rabbihī kalimāt (al-Baqara 2/37) — "Adam received words from his Lord". There too the verb conveys the receiving of a word, its being met and made one's own.

And the most striking side of the usage here is the object of the preposition: bi-alsinatikum — "you were taking it up with your tongues".

This is an unlooked-for combination in the language. A thing is normally received with the ear. The verse binds the receiving to the tongue.

And this combination describes how a report spreads. Thus:

A report is not received by hearing and left there. The act of receiving is completed only when it is repeated. A man has not really "received" a report — he has received it the moment he says it to another. Saying is part of receiving.

The verse, that is, removes the distance between hearing and saying and joins the two in a single verb: talaqqī bi'l-lisān.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the expression itself: that the instrument of the verb "to receive" is given as the tongue stands in the wording of the text, and it is out of the ordinary.

The explanations given for this expression in the classical commentaries look in a similar direction: one man's taking the report over from another, its going from mouth to mouth, everyone taking it from the one before and giving it to the one after. I transmit these explanations as views that are transmitted.

A variant reading is transmitted in the sources: it is recorded that the word is also read تَلِقُونَهُ (talikūnahū). This reading comes from the root و-ل-ق, and the sense the lexicographers record for it is to say a thing quickly and without stopping, to keep telling it.

ReadingRootSense
تَلَقَّوْنَهُل-ق-يTo take over — to receive from another and make one's own
تَلِقُونَهُو-ل-قTo keep saying — to turn it over in the mouth

Both readings are transmitted in the sources; since I cannot state with certainty which reader read which, I write no names.

And the two readings complete each other: the one describes how the report comes (by being taken over), the other how it goes (by being said without ceasing). I record this complementarity as my own reading.

وَتَقُولُونَ بِأَفْوَاهِكُم — the second organ

The verse names two organs, and both are worth noting: alsina (tongues) and afwāh (mouths).

The expression "you say with your mouths" looks at first like a needless repetition. Saying is done with the mouth in any case.

But the Qurʾān uses this expression for a definite work, and this was recorded earlier in this commentary. At al-Aḥzāb, 33/4, the same pattern occurs: dhālikum qawlukum bi-afwāhikum — "that is your word with your mouths". The context there was an ascription that had no reality.

The work of the pattern, therefore, is this, and it is explained in this direction in the classical commentaries too: the qualification bi'l-fam conveys that the word stays only in the mouth, that there is no reality behind it. It comes out of the mouth but does not rest on any knowledge.

And the verse's next clause says this outright: mā laysa lakum bihī ʿilm — "what you have no knowledge of".

The work of the two organs in the arrangement:

OrganVerbIts work
لِسَان (tongue)talaqqī — to receiveThe report's entry
فَم (mouth)qawl — to sayThe report's exit

The verse, that is, pictures man as a pipe through which the report passes: it goes in at one end, comes out at the other, and nothing is done to it in between.

The name of what is not done is given in the verse: ʿilm.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is that the two organs are named separately and that the note of the absence of knowledge is set between them. The order stands in the wording of the text.

مَّا لَيْسَ لَكُم بِهِۦ عِلْمٌ — "what you have no knowledge of"

The expression is a pattern repeated in the Qurʾān and occurred earlier in this commentary: wa lā taqfu mā laysa laka bihī ʿilm (al-Isrāʾ 17/36) — "do not pursue what you have no knowledge of".

And the pattern here uses a language of possession: laysa lakum bihī ʿilm — "you have no knowledge of it".

Knowledge, that is, is placed as something held in the hand. For a man to be able to speak on a matter he must have something in hand. And in slander there is nothing in the hand at all — the fourth verse had already bound this to a condition: four witnesses.

And the measure recorded at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/12, works here exactly: the note there was this — "The Qurʾān does not censure supposition in itself. What it censures is the putting of an unproved assumption in the place of certain knowledge."

al-Nūr 24/15 shows how that "putting in the place of certain knowledge" comes about: as a word passes from tongue to tongue it gains no knowledge — but it gains the look of knowledge. For what is said by many people appears, by the very frequency of its being said, to have been verified.

I record this as my own reading.

وَتَحْسَبُونَهُۥ هَيِّنًا وَهُوَ عِندَ ٱللَّهِ عَظِيمٌ — "you were thinking it a small thing"

This is one of the strongest sentences in the sūra and deserves separate treatment.

هَيِّن — root ه-و-ن. Its concrete sense is lightness, ease, smallness of weight. Hawn — softness, not being heavy. Hīn / hāʾin — counted worthless. Ihāna — to make light of a man, to devalue him. The Turkish hain comes from this root, though its sense has drifted.

The word is used in the Qurʾān of God's power as well: huwa ʿalayya hayyin (Maryam 19/9) — "that is easy for Me". The word, then, is not negative in itself; it conveys a measure of weight.

And what the verse builds is a contrast of measures:

Man's measureThe measure in God's sight
The wordhayyin — lightʿaẓīm — great
The rootه-و-نع-ظ-م
The concrete sense of the rootSmallness of weightBone (ʿaẓm) — the body's hard, heavy frame

The relation of the root ع-ظ-م with ʿaẓm (bone) was recorded in al-Ḥāqqa. The picture that appears when the two roots are set side by side is this: lightness on the one hand, a skeleton on the other.

And what the sentence does is to make a diagnosis.

The verse does not say that those who spread the slander were of ill intent. What it says is finer and far more common: they held the measure wrongly.

The importance of this diagnosis lies here, and I record it as my own reading:

A man doing something he knows to be wrong feels he must defend himself. But doing something he supposes to be of no importance he offers no resistance at all — for in that case there is not even a decision.

And this is exactly what makes the mechanics of a report's spread possible. The crowd that spread the slander was not, taken one by one, doing a great evil: each of them was only saying a sentence. And each one's own share was, in his own eyes, hayyin.

But the verse had said in the eleventh that the shares are divided: li-kulli'mriʾin minhum ma'ktasaba mina'l-ithm. The text, that is, establishes this: the share may be small; but to have a share is not to be exempt from a share.

And it is said who holds the measure: ʿinda'llāh. The qualification is the same as in the thirteenth verse: there too the ruling was given with the qualification ʿinda'llāh.

The distance between هَيِّنًا and what is great: a sum

The contrast of measures the verse builds has one further side, and I record it as my own reading.

There is a reason for supposing it hayyin: in a report that spreads, no one sees the whole of it.

The one who first says it does not see where it will go. The link in the middle does not know through how many people it has already passed. The last link does not know the first source. Every link sees only its own share, and its own share really is small.

But the harm is the sum of the shares, and no one sees the sum.

And the verse's qualification ʿinda'llāh sits exactly at this point: the party that sees the sum is the party that holds the measure.

I record this reading as my own reading; its ground is that the verse has set the qualification ʿinda'llāh between hayyin and ʿaẓīm.

al-Ḥujurāt and al-Nūr: two halves of the same matter

These two sūras are the texts in the Qurʾān that treat the ethics of report and of speech in the greatest detail, and they complete each other. Relying on the discussions of al-Ḥujurāt 49/6 and 49/12, I record the comparison:

49. al-Ḥujurāt24. al-Nūr
SubjectThe verifying of a reportThe proof of an accusation, and its spread
The kind of reportNabaʾ — about a community, calling for actionIfk — about the privacy of a person
The one addressedThe receiver of the report (49/6: fa-tabayyanū)Both the receiver (24/12) and the spreader (24/15, 19)
The first act commandedVerifying / halting (tabayyun / tathabbut)Rejecting (hādhā ifkun mubīn)
The beginning of the chainSupposition (49/12) — in the mindSupposition (24/12) — in the mind
The middle of the chainPrying (49/12) — searching outTaking over (24/15)
The end of the chainBackbiting (49/12) — on the tongueSpreading (24/19)
SanctionNone — a rule of mannersPresent — eighty strokes, the rejection of testimony (24/4)
Condition of proofNone — "verify"Present — four witnesses (24/4, 13)
The comparison usedThe flesh of a dead brother (49/12)Overflowing water (24/14), a thrown stone (24/4)
Who holds the measureWa'llāhu baṣīrun bimā taʿmalūn (49/18)Wa huwa ʿinda'llāhi ʿaẓīm (24/15)

What the two sūras build together is this, and I record it as my own reading:

al-Ḥujurāt regulates what is to be done with a report; al-Nūr fixes what an accusation is.

In al-Ḥujurāt the report may turn out to be true, and if it does one acts. In al-Nūr the matter is different: a claim about the privacy of a person is not even a thing whose truth is to be looked into, so long as it is not proved by four witnesses.

The shared backbone of the two sūras, however, is the same: the word is stopped before it goes into circulation. al-Ḥujurāt does this by waiting, al-Nūr by closing the door.

What this says to the present

One. There is no such thing as the innocence of the middleman.

The verse's four verbs — to receive, to say, not to know, to count light — describe not a source but a carrier. And the text takes the carrier as its addressee.

This is the distinction most often lost in today's terms. There is a difference of degree between the man who first puts a claim about and the man who passes it on — the eleventh verse already recorded this (alladhī tawallā kibrahū). But a difference of degree is not an exemption.

Two. The diagnosing of "thinking it a small thing".

The most useful side of the verse is that it diagnoses not a behaviour but an error of appraisal. And the symptom of that error can be recognised: not having stopped to think at all before saying a word.

A man hesitates when he says something he thinks weighty. If there is no hesitation, that word is for that man hayyin. The verse gives a measure, and the measure can be read from within.

Three. And a limit: this verse does not forbid speaking.

What the verse forbids is the saying of what one has no knowledge of; not the saying of words. In the twelfth verse the saying of a sentence was commanded. The sūra asks not for silence but for the saying of what one has in hand.


24/16

وَلَوْلَآ إِذْ سَمِعْتُمُوهُ قُلْتُم مَّا يَكُونُ لَنَآ أَن نَّتَكَلَّمَ بِهَٰذَا سُبْحَٰنَكَ هَٰذَا بُهْتَٰنٌ عَظِيمٌ

Wa law lā idh samiʿtumūhu qultum mā yakūnu lanā an natakallama bi-hādhā subḥānaka hādhā buhtānun ʿaẓīm

"When you heard it, ought you not to have said: 'It is not for us to speak of this. Glory be to You — this is a great slander'?"

The same moment a second time

The verse opens with the same note of time as the twelfth: idh samiʿtumūh — "when you heard it".

The sūra, that is, returns twice to the same moment and twice asks for a different sentence:

VerseThe sentence asked forWhat it does
12hādhā ifkun mubīn — "this is a plain slander"A judgement about the report
16mā yakūnu lanā an natakallama bi-hādhā — "it is not for us to speak of this"A judgement about oneself

The two sentences look in two different directions, and this is the verse's most important point of arrangement.

The sentence in the twelfth verse rejects the truth of the report. The sentence in the sixteenth, without entering the question of truth at all, rejects the speaker's standing to speak.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the content of the two sentences.

مَّا يَكُونُ لَنَآ — "it is not for us"

In Arabic the pattern conveys a lack of standing. Literally: "it is not for us", "this does not belong to us". The Qurʾān uses the same pattern elsewhere: mā yakūnu lī an aqūla mā laysa lī bi-ḥaqq (al-Māʾida 5/116) — "it is not for me to say what is not my right".

And the work of the pattern here is worth recording.

The verse does not say "this is not true" or "we do not know this". It says "this is not our business".

Two distinct positions, then, can be taken in the face of a report, and the sūra asks for both:

PositionIts groundWhat it says
Rejection grounded on knowledge (12)There is no evidence in hand"This is a slander"
Rejection grounded on standing (16)This domain is not mine"It is not for me to speak of this"

Recording the second position is important, because it is wider than the first.

We cannot always know whether a report is true. But we can always know whether a report belongs to us. The second question requires no knowledge.

And this is the same as the logic of the prohibition of tajassus (prying) at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/12. The measure recorded there was this: "The difference lies in whose the knowledge is: where a lost brother is is no one's privacy; but a man's hidden condition belongs to him."

al-Nūr 24/16 builds the same measure from the side of speech: if a piece of knowledge is not mine, then speaking about it is not mine either.

I record this connection as my own reading.

تَكَلَّمَkalām

Root: ك-ل-م. And the root has an interesting side: from the same root come both kalima (a word) and kalm (a wound).

Kalm — a wound opened upon a body, a cut. The connection the lexicographers draw is this: a word leaves a mark upon the one who hears it — just as a wound does.

I transmit this connection as an explanation the lexicographers record, not as a claim of derivation. That the two words are from the same root stands in the dictionary.

And the context here shows the reasonable side of the connection: the verse is speaking of what a word does in a human being.

سُبْحَٰنَكَ — an unlooked-for word

Here is the most striking place in the verse, and it has been dwelt on in the classical commentaries.

Subḥānaka — "glory be to You". Root س-ب-ح: to swim, to go flowing; and from there tasbīḥ: to keep a thing clear of what does not befit it. The root has been taken up at many places in this commentary; it will return in the forty-first verse of the sūra.

And the difficulty is this: why is a sentence of tanzīh said in the face of a report of slander?

The explanations transmitted in the classical commentaries are these:

ExplanationIts content
1The word is used here not in its primary sense but as an expression of wonder and astonishment; this usage exists in Arabic
2The word is in its full sense: God is held clear in the face of the enormity of what has been said
3Tanzīh was called for because the claim in question touches a domain God protects

I impose no preference, and none is binding.

But an observation about the word order may be recorded, and I give it as my own reading: the sentence the verse asks for has three parts, and each of the three looks in a different direction.

PartDirectionWhat it says
Mā yakūnu lanā an natakallama bi-hādhāTowards oneselfThis is not my business
SubḥānakaUpwardThis is not a thing to be said before the one who set the measure
Hādhā buhtānun ʿaẓīmTowards the reportThis is a slander

In a single sentence, then, the verse asks for three distinct judgements: of one's standing, of the measure, and of the report.

بُهْتَٰنٌ عَظِيمٌ — the slander that stuns

Root: ب-ه-ت. This root was analysed in al-Mumtaḥana; I rely on that treatment. The note there:

Root ب-ه-ت: to strike dumb, to leave stunned. Buhtān is not an ordinary lie: it is a slander so unlooked for that it stuns the one it is aimed at, one before which he does not know what to say. The word itself describes the effect of the slander.

And the usage at al-Baqara 2/258 was named there: fa-buhita'lladhī kafar — "the one who disbelieved was struck dumb".

Now the three words in the sūra can be set side by side, and it is seen that each does a distinct work:

WordVerseRootWhat it looks at
إِفْك11, 12أ-ف-ك — to turn aboutThe structure of the slander — the truth turned inside out
بُهْتَان16ب-ه-ت — to strike dumbThe effect of the slander — leaving the other without an answer
فَاحِشَة19ف-ح-ش — to exceed the measureThe name of what is spread

Three words in three different places, and none of the three is a needless repetition. The sūra names the same event from three different sides: what it is, what it does, and how it spreads.

I record this table as my own reading; the places and roots of the words stand in the text.

And one further observation: the sense of buhtān as "leaving without an answer" describes the condition of the one slandered.

The heaviest side of a slander is that it cannot be answered. That a thing not done was not done cannot be proved. There is no evidence in hand, because a thing that did not happen leaves no trace either. The one slandered is, for precisely this reason, buhita — struck dumb.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the sense in the root of the word, and that sense was recorded independently in al-Mumtaḥana.

And why the fourth verse puts the burden of proof upon the claimant is understood exactly here: because the other side cannot prove.


24/17-18

يَعِظُكُمُ ٱللَّهُ أَن تَعُودُوا۟ لِمِثْلِهِۦٓ أَبَدًا إِن كُنتُم مُّؤْمِنِينَ · وَيُبَيِّنُ ٱللَّهُ لَكُمُ ٱلْءَايَٰتِ وَٱللَّهُ عَلِيمٌ حَكِيمٌ

Yaʿiẓukumu'llāhu an taʿūdū li-mithlihī abadan in kuntum muʾminīn · Wa yubayyinu'llāhu lakumu'l-āyāt, wa'llāhu ʿalīmun ḥakīm

"God admonishes you never to return to the like of it, if you are believers. And God makes the verses clear to you. God is knowing, wise."

يَعِظُ — admonition

Root: و-ع-ظ. The sense the lexicographers record: to remind a man in a way that softens his heart and holds him back from a deed. Mawʿiẓa — an admonition.

In the definition of the word there are two elements at once: reminding and holding back. Waʿẓ, that is, is not the giving of knowledge; it is the bringing back of something known, in a way that changes behaviour.

And this is on the same line as tadhakkarūn in the first verse. In both places the sūra speaks not of giving new knowledge but of calling back something known.

أَن تَعُودُوا۟ لِمِثْلِهِۦٓ أَبَدًا — "that you never return to the like of it"

Two words in the expression are worth noting.

The first: li-mithlihī — "to the like of it". The verse does not say "do not return to this"; it says "to anything like this".

This carries the scope of the ruling out of the event and over to the kind. What is forbidden is not a particular report but everything of that kind.

I record this as an observation about the word order and find it in agreement with the measure recorded in al-Ḥujurāt: there too it was stated that the verses regulate not single events but kinds of event.

The second: abadā — "never". And this word occurred in the fourth verse too: wa lā taqbalū lahum shahādatan abadā.

VerseWhat abadā attaches to
4The non-acceptance of testimony
17The not returning again

The two usages answer each other, and I record this as my own reading: the one closes a door, the other a road. And between the two stands the note of repentance in the fifth verse.

إِن كُنتُم مُّؤْمِنِينَ — the condition comes a second time

This conditional clause occurs for the second time in the sūra. The first was in the second verse: in kuntum tuʾminūna bi'llāhi wa'l-yawmi'l-ākhir.

VerseWhat the condition attaches to
2That raʾfa should not stop the ruling
17That one should not return to the same thing

In both places the condition is set against a feeling or a habit. In the one, pity; in the other, the wish to carry a report.

I record this as an observation about the word order.

وَيُبَيِّنُ ٱللَّهُ لَكُمُ ٱلْءَايَٰتِ — the return of the root

The root ب-ي-ن returns here after the first verse, and it will return again and again in the sūra: 34, 46, 58, 59, 61.

The root's distribution through the sūra builds a weave:

VerseExpressionWho / what
1āyātin bayyinātAn attribute of the verses
12hādhā ifkun mubīnThe judgement the believers are asked to say
18yubayyinu'llāhu lakumu'l-āyātGod's act
25al-Ḥaqqu'l-MubīnA divine name
34āyātin mubayyinātAn attribute of the verses
46āyātin mubayyinātAn attribute of the verses
54al-balāghu'l-mubīnThe Prophet's task
58, 59, 61yubayyinu'llāhu lakumu'l-āyātGod's act

The root occurs ten times in the sūra, and at each occurrence a work of separating is done. This shows how the sūra names its own work.

I record this as my own reading; the places of the words can be counted in the text.


24/19

إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ يُحِبُّونَ أَن تَشِيعَ ٱلْفَٰحِشَةُ فِى ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ لَهُمْ عَذَابٌ أَلِيمٌ فِى ٱلدُّنْيَا وَٱلْءَاخِرَةِ وَٱللَّهُ يَعْلَمُ وَأَنتُمْ لَا تَعْلَمُونَ

Inna'lladhīna yuḥibbūna an tashīʿa'l-fāḥishatu fi'lladhīna āmanū lahum ʿadhābun alīmun fi'l-dunyā wa'l-ākhira, wa'llāhu yaʿlamu wa antum lā taʿlamūn

"For those who love that indecency should spread among those who believe there is a painful punishment in this world and in the hereafter. God knows, and you do not know."

The distinction the verse draws: not the doing, but the wanting it spread

This verse draws one of the finest distinctions in the sūra — and perhaps in the Qurʾān — and it will be taken up here in detail.

The verse does not censure an act. It censures a wish. And what is wished is not an act either, but the spreading of an act.

Let us open out the structure of the sentence:

LayerExpressionWhat
1al-fāḥishaThe act itself
2an tashīʿaThe spreading of that act
3yuḥibbūnaThe wanting of that spreading

What is censured is the third layer.

The verse, that is, speaks not of the one who commits the act but of the one who wants it to be heard that the act was committed. And this man may not have committed the act himself — indeed, in the picture the verse builds, it is likely that he did not.

Why this distinction matters so much I record in three items, and this is my own reading:

One. The verse names a type of harm. The harm of an act is confined to the one who commits it. The harm of an act's spreading, on the other hand, spreads over the whole community — for what spreads is no longer the act but an image.

Two. The verse points to an evil that goes about in a moral dress. The man who spreads an indecency generally spreads it by condemning it. The sentence "have you heard what happened" is, in form, a sentence of condemnation. And precisely for that reason the spreader thinks himself set against the act.

Three. And this is why the verse's word is yuḥibbūn: "they love". The verb conveys not an act but a leaning.

شَاعَ — the concrete sense of the root

Root: ش-ي-ع. This root was analysed at al-Qamar, 54/51, at al-Ṣāffāt, 37/83, and at al-Qaṣaṣ, 28/4; I rely on those treatments.

The note there was this: the concrete sense of the root is to spread, to scatter, to go in every direction. Shāʿa'l-khabar — the report spread. Ashāʿa — he spread it. The Turkish expression şuyu bulmak ("to become widely known") is from the same root.

And the root's second sense: a body of people who follow someone, a party of partisans (shīʿa, plural shiyaʿ and ashyāʿ).

The sentence recorded in the al-Ṣāffāt section works exactly here: "at the centre of the word there are two things: to follow a person, and to spread that person's cause."

And the connection between the two senses of the root explains the mechanics of the verse, and I record this as my own reading:

The spreading of a thing and the forming of a group are named from the same root. For when a report spreads, a bond forms of itself among those who carry it — a shared piece of knowledge, a shared stance, a shared subject of talk.

And this joins with the word ʿuṣba in the eleventh verse: there those who brought the slander were named "a band bound to one another". In the nineteenth verse it is seen how that bond is formed: by spreading.

VerseWordRootWhat it conveys
11ʿuṣbaع-ص-ب — to bindThe state of the group
19tashīʿaش-ي-ع — to spread; and to take a sideThe act of the group

The two words name the same fact from two sides. I record this table as my own reading; the roots of the words stand in the dictionary.

فَاحِشَة — an ugliness that exceeds the measure

Root: ف-ح-ش. The sense the lexicographers record: a thing's being so ugly as to exceed its measure, its excess. Fāḥish — excessive, beyond measure. Fuḥsh — ugliness.

At the centre of the word stands "excess", and the word is not used only of an act. In Arabic fāḥish is used of a price as well: a price that exceeds the measure.

And the word will occur twice more in the sūra: al-faḥshāʾ in the twenty-first verse (as what Satan commands), and the root in the thirty-third, in the domain named together with bighāʾ.

The usage in the verse is worth recording: the verse does not say al-zinā, it says al-fāḥisha. What is named, that is, is not a particular act but a kind. This widens the scope of the prohibition: what is condemned in its spreading is not one kind of act alone.

And that the word al-fāḥisha comes definite draws a limit: the verse takes as its subject not "the spreading of every kind of report" but the spreading of what is of this kind.

فِى ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ — "among those who believe"

The preposition is worth noting: — "within". Not bayna (between) or ʿalā (upon).

The spreading, that is, is described as something happening within a community. And this looks in the same direction as the qualification minkum — "from among you" — in the eleventh verse.

From beginning to end the sūra keeps the matter inside a community. Not as an attack coming from outside but as a mechanism working within.

يُحِبُّونَ — "they love"

Root: ح-ب-ب. Its concrete sense is a seed, a grain (ḥabb). The connection the lexicographers draw: love is what settles in the heart like a seed and strikes root.

And the use of the verb in this verse is the place that must be read most carefully.

The verse does not censure an act: it censures a leaning. And a leaning lies further within than an act — it is seen by no one, it cannot be measured, it cannot be proved.

This is the same logic of "a circle narrowing from outside inward" recorded in al-Ḥujurāt. It was recorded there that the sūra puts the least visible thing last. al-Nūr does the same: it begins from an act that could be proved by four witnesses and comes down to a leaning that could never be proved at all.

And precisely for this reason the verse lays down no worldly sanction. The end of the sentence is this: lahum ʿadhābun alīmun fi'l-dunyā wa'l-ākhira — in this world and in the hereafter. This speaks not in the language of the court but in the language of the reckoning.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is that the verse gives neither a procedure of proof nor a measure of penalty. In the fourth verse there were both; here there is neither.

وَٱللَّهُ يَعْلَمُ وَأَنتُمْ لَا تَعْلَمُونَ — the close

The verse-ending is like the seal of the whole block, and it is extremely short: "God knows, and you do not know."

And the arrangement of the sentence is worth noting: the two parties are set side by side, the same verb is used (yaʿlam / taʿlamūn), the one affirmative, the other negative.

This is the summary of the whole section. In the fifteenth verse it had said mā laysa lakum bihī ʿilm — "what you have no knowledge of". The nineteenth repeats the same word in its last clause: wa antum lā taʿlamūn.

VerseExpressionWhat is not known
15mā laysa lakum bihī ʿilmAbout the content of the report
19wa antum lā taʿlamūnIn general

The sūra, that is, first identifies the ignorance as confined to one event, then records it as a general position.

I record this as an observation about the word order.

What this says to the present

One. Spreading in the form of condemnation.

This is the most familiar thing the verse points to, and it can be said in language that does not wound: the commonest way of telling an indecency is to tell it by condemning it.

And this form clears the spreader in his own eyes. For the grammatical structure of the sentence he says is a sentence of condemnation. But where the verse looks is not the structure of the sentence but its outcome: has a thing spread, or has it not?

The verse does not declare the man who does this to be evil. The verb it uses is yuḥibbūn — it describes a leaning. And leanings go on working so long as the man himself does not notice them.

Two. Where the distinction is placed.

A thing's happening and that thing's being heard of are separate events, and their outcomes differ.

An act has been committed. If three people know of it, the harm is at one place. If three hundred know of it, the harm is at another — and the increase of harm is the product not of the one who committed the act but of those who spread it.

The verse names this increase and binds a separate ruling to it.

Three. And the link with the sūra as a whole.

This verse explains why the condition of four witnesses in the fourth verse is so heavy. The condition is so heavy that bringing an act before the community is all but impossible. And the nineteenth verse says the reason: what is asked to be brought is most often in the service not of justice but of the spreading.

Four. A limit: this verse is not a command to cover things up.

To read the verse as "let no evil be spoken of" runs against the sūra itself. The sūra has built a procedure of proof; the existence of a procedure presupposes that matters can be brought somewhere. And as was recorded at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/9, as the counterpart of the ninth verse, the Qurʾān commands that action be taken against wrongdoing.

What the verse closes is not the road of justice — it is the road of gossip. The difference between the two stands in the verse's own word: tashīʿa — to spread. A matter taken to an authority does not spread; a matter recounted does.

I record this distinction as my own reading.


24/20

وَلَوْلَا فَضْلُ ٱللَّهِ عَلَيْكُمْ وَرَحْمَتُهُۥ وَأَنَّ ٱللَّهَ رَءُوفٌ رَّحِيمٌ

Wa law lā faḍlu'llāhi ʿalaykum wa raḥmatuhū wa anna'llāha raʾūfun raḥīm

"And were it not for God's bounty towards you and His mercy, and that God is most kind, most merciful…"

A third time, a condition without an answer

The pattern of the tenth verse is repeated here, and again its answer is not spoken.

But there is a difference, and it is worth noting: in the tenth verse the close was tawwābun ḥakīm; here it is raʾūfun raḥīm.

VerseThe closeIts kind
10tawwābun ḥakīmRepentance + ruling
20raʾūfun raḥīmKindness + mercy

In the second verse raʾfa had been forbidden — on the condition that it should not stop the ruling. And now the same root returns as a name of God: raʾūf.

This is one of the finest rings in the sūra's arrangement, and I record it as my own reading:

VerseWordWhoseWhat
2raʾfatunMan'sThe feeling asked not to stop the ruling
20raʾūfunGod'sThe name invoked after the ruling

The sūra thus separates this: a man's raʾfa cannot alter a measure that has been set; but the raʾfa of the one who sets the measure stands behind the measure itself.

The definition recorded at al-Ḥashr, 59/10, shows its use here: raʾfa contains the refusal to give pain at all, the refusal to hurt. And this is exactly the work done between the eleventh and the twentieth verses — a community has made a heavy mistake, and in correcting it the text has entered a note of bounty and mercy four times in ten verses.

I record this as an observation of count: 10, 14, 20, 21.


24/21

يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ لَا تَتَّبِعُوا۟ خُطُوَٰتِ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنِ وَمَن يَتَّبِعْ خُطُوَٰتِ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنِ فَإِنَّهُۥ يَأْمُرُ بِٱلْفَحْشَآءِ وَٱلْمُنكَرِ وَلَوْلَا فَضْلُ ٱللَّهِ عَلَيْكُمْ وَرَحْمَتُهُۥ مَا زَكَىٰ مِنكُم مِّنْ أَحَدٍ أَبَدًا وَلَٰكِنَّ ٱللَّهَ يُزَكِّى مَن يَشَآءُ وَٱللَّهُ سَمِيعٌ عَلِيمٌ

Yā ayyuhā'lladhīna āmanū lā tattabiʿū khuṭuwāti'l-shayṭān, wa man yattabiʿ khuṭuwāti'l-shayṭāni fa-innahū yaʾmuru bi'l-faḥshāʾi wa'l-munkar, wa law lā faḍlu'llāhi ʿalaykum wa raḥmatuhū mā zakā minkum min aḥadin abadan wa lākinna'llāha yuzakkī man yashāʾ, wa'llāhu samīʿun ʿalīm

"O you who believe, do not follow the footsteps of Satan. Whoever follows the footsteps of Satan — he commands indecency and what is wrong. Were it not for God's bounty towards you and His mercy, not one of you would ever have been purified; but God purifies whom He wills. God is hearing, knowing."

خُطُوَٰت — footsteps

Root: خ-ط-و. Its concrete sense is to take a step. Khuṭwa — a step, the distance between two feet.

That the word comes in the plural, and that it is not a figure, is worth noting. The verse does not say "do not follow Satan's road" — it says "his footsteps".

And the difference between the two words describes a mechanism, which I record as my own reading:

A road is seen from the start; one decides whether to enter it or not. A step, on the other hand, is not a road by itself. As one steps, where one is going is not visible; only the place of the next step is.

And what is told between the eleventh and the twentieth verses is exactly a process that works step by step: a report is heard (12), repeated (15), thought a small thing (15), spread (19). At no stage does anyone say "I am now doing a great evil".

This is why the verse chooses the word khuṭuwāt, and the connection can be read from the arrangement: the verse comes immediately after the diagnosis of hayyinan (thinking it a small thing) in the fifteenth.

The form is worth noting too: tattabiʿū — Form VIII, ittibāʿ. This form conveys here a going after, a following of tracks. The man is not looking ahead; he is looking at someone's tracks.

And the expression is a pattern repeated in the Qurʾān: the same expression occurs at al-Baqara, 2/168 and 2/208, and also at al-Anʿām 6/142. The same structure in all four places: lā tattabiʿū khuṭuwāti'l-shayṭān.

ٱلْفَحْشَآءِ وَٱلْمُنكَرِ — two words

فَحْشَاء — root ف-ح-ش: analysed at the nineteenth verse. An ugliness that exceeds the measure.

مُنكَر — root ن-ك-ر: not to be recognised, to be found strange. The root was analysed at Luqmān, 31/19 (ankara'l-aṣwāt — the most jarring of voices) and occurred at 31/17 as wa'nha ʿani'l-munkar; I rely on those treatments.

The coming of the two words together sets up a scale:

WordRootIts measure
فَحْشَاءف-ح-ش — excessIts degree — what exceeds the measure
مُنكَرن-ك-ر — not being recognisedIts recognisability — what men find strange

The one, that is, looks at quantity, the other at recognition. The opposite of munkar is maʿrūf: what is known, recognised, accepted by everyone as right.

مَا زَكَىٰ مِنكُم مِّنْ أَحَدٍ أَبَدًا — purification

زَكَىٰ — root ز-ك-و. This root has been taken up at many places in this commentary — al-Aʿlā, al-Shams, al-Layl, ʿAbasa. Its concrete sense: to increase, to grow, to be fruitful; and to be cleansed.

The lexicographers draw the connection between the two senses of the root thus: a thing grows only when it has been cleared of foreign elements. A crop yields nothing until it is cleared of weeds.

And the word will return again and again in the sūra:

VerseExpressionWhat
21mā zakā minkum min aḥadPurification
28huwa azkā lakumThe outcome of the manners of asking leave
30dhālika azkā lahumThe outcome of lowering the glance
37ītāʾi'l-zakātThe alms

The same root in four places, in three different tasks. And in all three the same thing is said: to hold back from a thing is the condition of increase.

I record this as my own reading; the places of the words can be counted in the text and their repetitions seen.

And the qualification in the verse's arrangement is important: mā zakā minkum min aḥadin abadā — "not one of you would ever have been purified". Purification, that is, is not set down as an outcome man reaches on his own. The sentence goes on with an exception: wa lākinna'llāha yuzakkī man yashāʾ.

This enters a note upon the whole of the section. The verses from eleven to twenty-one were correcting a community's fault. And the section closes by saying that those who were corrected did not achieve it themselves.

This note also settles how the sūra is to be read: to take up the text and use it to sort the purified from the unpurified runs against the verse's last sentence.


24/22

وَلَا يَأْتَلِ أُو۟لُوا۟ ٱلْفَضْلِ مِنكُمْ وَٱلسَّعَةِ أَن يُؤْتُوٓا۟ أُو۟لِى ٱلْقُرْبَىٰ وَٱلْمَسَٰكِينَ وَٱلْمُهَٰجِرِينَ فِى سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ وَلْيَعْفُوا۟ وَلْيَصْفَحُوٓا۟ أَلَا تُحِبُّونَ أَن يَغْفِرَ ٱللَّهُ لَكُمْ وَٱللَّهُ غَفُورٌ رَّحِيمٌ

Wa lā yaʾtali ulu'l-faḍli minkum wa'l-saʿati an yuʾtū uli'l-qurbā wa'l-masākīna wa'l-muhājirīna fī sabīli'llāh, wa'l-yaʿfū wa'l-yaṣfaḥū, a lā tuḥibbūna an yaghfira'llāhu lakum, wa'llāhu ghafūrun raḥīm

"And let not those of you who have bounty and means swear not to give to their kinsfolk, to the needy, and to those who emigrate in the way of God; let them pardon and let them overlook. Do you not wish that God should forgive you? God is forgiving, merciful."

The verse's place: a call to pardon coming after the slander

The verse's place in the sūra is as important as the verse itself.

The verses from eleven to twenty-one took up a slander, described those who brought it in the heaviest terms, announced a penalty and built a procedure. And the twenty-second verse comes directly after that section and says go on giving.

The one addressed by the verse is the party harmed by the slander. This is understood from the subject of the sentence: ulu'l-faḍli minkum wa'l-saʿa — "those of you who have bounty and means". That is, the giving party, the one who has the means in hand.

And this arrangement is one of the most unlooked-for moves in the sūra:

VerseWhat is done
11-21The slander is condemned; a sanction and a procedure are laid down
22Pardon is asked of the party that was harmed
23-25The condition of those who slandered is bound over to the hereafter

The text, that is, sets two rulings one after the other: the act is grave, and let the one harmed by the act pardon.

The logic of this is given in the verse's last sentence: a lā tuḥibbūna an yaghfira'llāhu lakum — "do you not wish that God should forgive you?"

يَأْتَلِ — the root أ-ل-و and two readings

This is the most disputed word in the verse in point of language, and the root's two distinct senses lead to two distinct readings.

Root: أ-ل-و. And the two clusters of sense the lexicographers record are these:

Cluster of senseVerbAn example of the usage
1. To swearālā / iʾtalāAly / aliyya — an oath. Īlāʾ — to swear not to do a thing
2. To fall short, to hold back, to spare one's effortalā yaʾlūLā yaʾlūnakum khabālā (Āl ʿImrān 3/118) — "they spare no effort to do you harm"

And the verb yaʾtali in the verse (Form VIII) is understood in two ways, according to which of the two senses it carries:

ReadingThe sense of the rootThe sense of the sentence
1Oath"Let them not swear not to give"
2Falling short, holding back"Let them not hold back from giving, let them not fall short"

This disagreement is recorded openly in the classical commentaries and both readings are transmitted. I impose no preference, and neither is binding.

Moreover it is transmitted in the sources that the word is read in a different form as well — in Form V (yataʾalla), again with the sense of swearing. Since I cannot state with certainty which reader read which, I write no names.

What the two readings have in common may be recorded: both forbid the cutting off of giving. Where they part is over whether the cutting off is done by an oath or in silence.

And an observation: the first reading gives the cutting off a form. An oath is an attempt to make a decision irreversible. The first reading, that is, describes the tendency of a grievance to make itself permanent.

I record this as my own reading.

A note on the root: the derivative آلَاء (ālāʾ — favours), formed of the same letters, was treated at al-Najm, 53/55, and in the al-Raḥmān section. The lexicographers are not agreed as to whether these derivatives come from a single root; I draw no connection from it here.

أُو۟لُوا۟ ٱلْفَضْلِوَٱلسَّعَةِ — two attributes

The verse names its addressee with two attributes, and both are worth noting:

فَضْل — root ف-ض-ل: to increase, to be over and above; and superiority. The concrete sense of the word is "the part left over"; English covers the two ends of this root with two unconnected words — surplus and excellence.

سَعَة — root و-س-ع: breadth. Wāsiʿ — wide; saʿa — breadth of means, material ease.

The two words return again a few verses later in the sūra:

VerseWordWhose
10, 14, 20, 21faḍlu'llāhGod's bounty
22ulu'l-faḍlMan's surplus
32yughnihimu'llāhu min faḍlihGod's bounty
38wa yazīdahum min faḍlihGod's bounty

And this distribution says something, which I record as my own reading: the same word is used in one verse of what God gives to His servant, and in the next of a servant's giving to a servant. The faḍlu'llāhi ʿalaykum of the twenty-first verse and the ulu'l-faḍli minkum of the twenty-second stand back to back.

This transition in the arrangement builds in advance the logic of the verse's last sentence: you resist over giving what you were given; and you go on expecting to receive.

وَلْيَعْفُوا۟ وَلْيَصْفَحُوٓا۟ — two verbs

The verse uses two distinct verbs of pardon, and the difference between them is recorded by the classical lexicographers.

عَفَا — root ع-ف-و. The root was analysed in al-Mujādala and at al-Shūrā, 42/40; I rely on those treatments. The note there: the concrete sense of the root is to wipe out, to erase the trace — as the wind erases footprints on sand. And its difference from ghufrān: what is covered is still there but not seen; what is erased is no longer there.

صَفَحَ — root ص-ف-ح. The root was analysed at al-Zukhruf, 43/5 and 43/89; I rely on those treatments. The note there: the concrete sense of the root is the name of a surface — ṣafḥa: the side of a thing, its flat face.

And the concrete senses of the two words describe two distinct acts:

VerbRootIts concrete pictureWhat it does
عَفَاع-ف-وTo erase the traceIt drops the claim — nothing is owed
صَفَحَص-ف-حTo turn one's face, to turn the pageIt keeps the relation — no face is soured

The classical lexicographers count ṣafḥ as going further than ʿafw, and the ground stands in the picture of the root: to pardon is to drop a claim; ṣafḥ is, after that, not to turn one's face away, to bring the relation back to what it was.

I transmit this distinction as an explanation the lexicographers record; I do not claim that it is an absolute rule.

And that the verse asks for both verbs together is worth noting. A man may drop a claim of his and still turn his face from the person. The verse asks for both at once.

And one further detail in the arrangement: the command to pardon comes after the command to go on giving. The order, that is, is this:

OrderCommand
1an yuʾtūgo on giving
2wa'l-yaʿfū — pardon
3wa'l-yaṣfaḥū — overlook

What belongs to the deed first, what belongs to the heart after. The verse asks first that the hand should not stop.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the order of the commands. And I add this: had the order been reversed — first pardon, then go on giving — pardon would have been the condition of the act of giving. In this order, giving is placed before pardon.

أَلَا تُحِبُّونَ أَن يَغْفِرَ ٱللَّهُ لَكُمْ — the question

This is the strongest sentence in the verse, and it is framed as a question.

And the verb draws attention: tuḥibbūn — "do you not wish?". The same verb occurred three verses earlier (19) in a context of censure: yuḥibbūna an tashīʿa'l-fāḥisha — "they love that it spread".

VerseWhat the loving is directed at
19an tashīʿa'l-fāḥisha — the spreading of indecency
22an yaghfira'llāhu lakum — God's forgiving

The same verb, three verses apart, with two opposite objects. This is a repetition that can be verified from the text, and I record it as an observation about the word order.

And the logic the question builds rests not upon reciprocity but upon consistency.

The verse does not say "pardon so that you may be pardoned"; it sets up no exchange. It says: you wish to be forgiven. Then you know what forgiving is.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the mood of the sentence: not a conditional but a question.

What this says to the present

One. A grievance making itself permanent.

The verb in the verse's first reading — to swear — describes a behaviour: the turning of a grievance into a decision.

And the logic of this can be understood. A grievance grows less of itself with time. A decision does not. An oath is a grievance's attempt to protect itself against time.

The verse stands against this, and it does something striking: it does not find the grievance unjust. The verses from eleven to twenty-one condemned in the heaviest terms the act that caused the grievance. The verse asks that a just grievance should not turn into a severance.

Two. On what plane the pardon is asked for.

The verse does not lift the penalty. The sanction of the fourth verse stands where it is; the ruling that will come in the twenty-third stands where it is. What is lifted is the requital that lies in a man's own hand.

This distinction matters: pardon does not take the place of justice. It stands beside justice, in a place of its own.

Three. And a note: this verse is not an instrument of pressure.

To use the verse in order to tell another man "you must pardon" is to change the verse's addressee. The verse's address is directed at the one who is to pardon — not at the one who expects something from him.

And this agrees with the sūra's general measure: as was recorded in al-Ḥujurāt, the text is an instrument of diagnosis, and the diagnosis is applied first to oneself.


24/23

إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ يَرْمُونَ ٱلْمُحْصَنَٰتِ ٱلْغَٰفِلَٰتِ ٱلْمُؤْمِنَٰتِ لُعِنُوا۟ فِى ٱلدُّنْيَا وَٱلْءَاخِرَةِ وَلَهُمْ عَذَابٌ عَظِيمٌ

Inna'lladhīna yarmūna'l-muḥṣanāti'l-ghāfilāti'l-muʾmināti luʿinū fi'l-dunyā wa'l-ākhirati wa lahum ʿadhābun ʿaẓīm

"Those who cast a charge at chaste, unsuspecting, believing women are cursed in this world and in the hereafter; and for them there is a great punishment."

Three attributes

The verse names the party slandered with three attributes, and all three are worth recording.

AttributeRootIts senseWhat it looks at
ٱلْمُحْصَنَاتح-ص-نProtected — like a fortressThe actual condition
ٱلْغَٰفِلَاتغ-ف-لUnsuspecting, to whom it never even occurredThe state of mind
ٱلْمُؤْمِنَاتأ-م-نBelievingThe condition in belief

The second attribute is one of the most affecting words in the sūra and deserves separate treatment.

ٱلْغَٰفِلَٰت — those who are unaware

Root: غ-ف-ل. Its concrete sense is to be unaware of a thing, not to hold it in mind, to have it escape one's notice. Ghafla — inattention; ghufl — bearing no mark upon it, unbranded (used of a piece of land or of a camel).

The second sense of the root is interesting: ghufl is what bears no trace or mark upon it. An unbranded camel, a stretch of land with no track across it. At the centre of the word, then, there is also the idea of "bearing no mark".

And in the verse's context this builds a picture: the party slandered is the party upon whom there is no mark at all. And slander is an attempt to set a mark where there is none.

I record this as my own reading; the second sense of the root is a usage the lexicographers record.

And the attribute has another side: ghāfilāt means "those to whom such a thing never even occurred". The attribute conveys, that is, not only that the act was not done but that there was not even a thought of it in the mind.

This sense of the word is widely recorded in the classical commentaries.

لُعِنُوا۟ — the passive voice

The verb is passive: luʿinū — "they are cursed". Its agent is not named.

And the tense is perfect. The ruling is announced not as something to be given in the future but as already given.

The root ل-ع-ن occurred in the sixth and seventh verses in the discussion of liʿān: laʿnatu'llāhi ʿalayh. The same word, in two different places:

VerseWho says itUpon whom
7A man — about himself, on a conditionUpon himself, if he is lying
23The text — as a rulingUpon those who cast the charge

What a man calls down upon himself conditionally in the seventh verse is announced as a ruling in the twenty-third. This is an observation about the word order, and the places of the words stand in the text.

The difference from the fourth verse

The verse repeats the verb of the fourth (yarmūn) but announces a different outcome:

24/424/23
Verbyarmūna'l-muḥṣanātyarmūna'l-muḥṣanāti'l-ghāfilāti'l-muʾmināt
OutcomeA worldly sanction — eighty strokes, the rejection of testimonyA ruling of the hereafter — a curse, a great punishment
ConditionThe failure to bring four witnesses
A note of repentancePresent (24/5)

The two verses give the counterpart of the same act on two different planes. And the increase in the attributes (three of them) shows that the second verse takes as its subject a narrower case — the case in which innocence is certain.

I record this as an observation about the word order.


24/24

يَوْمَ تَشْهَدُ عَلَيْهِمْ أَلْسِنَتُهُمْ وَأَيْدِيهِمْ وَأَرْجُلُهُم بِمَا كَانُوا۟ يَعْمَلُونَ

Yawma tashhadu ʿalayhim alsinatuhum wa aydīhim wa arjuluhum bimā kānū yaʿmalūn

"On the day when their tongues, their hands and their feet will bear witness against them concerning what they used to do."

The return of the root of witnessing

Up to now the root ش-ه-د has occurred four times in the sūra: at 2 (wa'l-yashhad), at 4 (shuhadāʾ, shahādatan), at 6 and 8 (shuhadāʾ, shahādāt), at 13 (shuhadāʾ).

And now it occurs for a fifth time — but the witness has changed.

VerseWho is the witnessTo what
2ṭāʾifatun mina'l-muʾminīnTo the carrying out of the penalty
4, 13Four personsTo the truth of the claim
6-9The man himself — by oathTo his own claim
24The man's own limbsAgainst the man himself

The sūra builds a chain of witnessing, and at the end of the chain the witness and the accused meet in the same body.

I record this as my own reading; the distribution of the root can be counted in the text.

أَلْسِنَتُهُمْ — the tongues named first

The order of the limbs is worth noting: tongue, then hand, then foot.

In similar verses of the Qurʾān the order may differ (at Fuṣṣilat 41/20-21, hearing, eyes and skins; at Yā Sīn 36/65, mouths, hands and feet). That the tongue is put first here has directly to do with the subject of the section.

For the act treated in the verses from eleven to twenty-three was an act done with the tongue:

VerseOrganExpression
15Tonguetalaqqawnahū bi-alsinatikum
15Mouthtaqūlūna bi-afwāhikum
24Tonguetashhadu ʿalayhim alsinatuhum

The same organ, nine verses apart, in two opposite tasks: first it carries the report, then it bears witness against the one who carried it.

I record this ring as my own reading; the places of the words and their sameness are the wording of the text.

تَشْهَدُ عَلَيْهِمْ — "against them"

The preposition is worth noting: ʿalā — "upon, against". In Arabic shahida li (he bore witness in someone's favour) is distinguished from shahida ʿalā (he bore witness against him). Here it is the second.

And the picture the sentence builds is this: a man is given up by his own body. There is no possibility of defence, because the other party is no stranger.

This is the reverse of the word buhtān in the sixteenth verse, and I record it as my own reading: there the one slandered could not answer, because he had no evidence in hand. Here the one who slandered cannot answer, because the evidence is his own body.


24/25

يَوْمَئِذٍ يُوَفِّيهِمُ ٱللَّهُ دِينَهُمُ ٱلْحَقَّ وَيَعْلَمُونَ أَنَّ ٱللَّهَ هُوَ ٱلْحَقُّ ٱلْمُبِينُ

Yawmaʾidhin yuwaffīhimu'llāhu dīnahumu'l-ḥaqqa wa yaʿlamūna anna'llāha huwa'l-Ḥaqqu'l-Mubīn

"On that day God will pay them their due in full, and they will know that God is the plain Truth."

يُوَفِّي — to pay in full

Root: و-ف-ي. Its concrete sense is to fulfil a thing completely, without any lack. Wafāʾ — to keep one's word in full. Awfā — he measured in full. Tawfiya — payment without deficiency.

And the word is the opposite of the root treated in al-Muṭaffifīn: taṭfīf is short measure; tawfiya is full measure.

دِينَهُمُ ٱلْحَقَّ — "their due"

دِين — root د-ي-ن. In Arabic the word has three fields of sense, and all three issue from this root:

SenseExample
A debt, what is to be paiddayn — a debt
Requital, recompense, judgementyawmu'l-dīn — the day of reckoning
Religion, a waydīn

The sense here is the second: the recompense that is due. The word's link with "debt" joins with the verb of the verse: yuwaffī — to pay in full. The verse, that is, builds a scene of payment.

And the attribute al-ḥaqq is worth noting: the recompense is not only "in full" but also "just". The two words reinforce one another: complete, and in its right place.

ٱلْحَقُّ ٱلْمُبِينُ — the sūra's first pairing of divine names

This is the only place in the sūra where the name al-Ḥaqq occurs, and the only place where the root ب-ي-ن comes together with a divine name.

And an observation about the word order may be recorded: the section between the eleventh and the twenty-fifth verses opened with a slander and closes with the name al-Ḥaqq al-Mubīn.

The head of the sectionThe end of the section
al-ifk (11) — what is turned aboutal-Ḥaqq (25) — what is true
ifkun mubīn (12) — a plain slanderal-Ḥaqqu'l-Mubīn (25) — the plain Truth

The two pairs of words stand facing each other: in the twelfth verse the believers were asked to say hādhā ifkun mubīn; in the twenty-fifth God is named al-Ḥaqq al-Mubīn. The same adjective, upon two opposite objects.

I record this as my own reading; the wording of the two expressions stands in the text and can be compared.


24/26

ٱلْخَبِيثَٰتُ لِلْخَبِيثِينَ وَٱلْخَبِيثُونَ لِلْخَبِيثَٰتِ وَٱلطَّيِّبَٰتُ لِلطَّيِّبِينَ وَٱلطَّيِّبُونَ لِلطَّيِّبَٰتِ أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ مُبَرَّءُونَ مِمَّا يَقُولُونَ لَهُم مَّغْفِرَةٌ وَرِزْقٌ كَرِيمٌ

Al-khabīthātu li'l-khabīthīna wa'l-khabīthūna li'l-khabīthāt, wa'l-ṭayyibātu li'l-ṭayyibīna wa'l-ṭayyibūna li'l-ṭayyibāt, ulāʾika mubarraʾūna mimmā yaqūlūn, lahum maghfiratun wa rizqun karīm

"The corrupt are for the corrupt, and the corrupt for the corrupt; the good are for the good, and the good for the good. Those are free of what is said. For them there is forgiveness and a generous provision."

The disagreement over how the verse is to be understood

This verse is one of the verses in the Qurʾān most disputed as to how it is to be understood, and the cause of the disagreement is that what the subjects of the sentence are is not stated.

Al-khabīthāt and al-ṭayyibāt — feminine plural adjectives. But what they are adjectives of is not said. In Arabic this pattern can answer to persons, to words, or to acts.

Three main readings are transmitted in the classical commentaries:

ReadingWhat khabīthāt / ṭayyibāt areThe sense of the sentenceIts ground
1. WordsSpeech (kalimāt, aqwāl)Bad words befit bad speakers, good words good speakers, and issue from themThe context: the mimmā yaqūlūn — "of what they say" — that follows the clause; the whole section is about speech
2. PersonsHuman beingsBad women befit bad men, good women good menThe masculine-feminine opposition of the words; the verse's being understood within the field of marriage
3. Acts, statesDeedsBad deeds belong to the bad, good deeds to the goodThe general use of the word

No preference is imposed in this section, and none is binding.

But a note of method needs to be entered, and it is a direct requirement of the method (Method): no ruling about persons can be drawn from this verse.

The reason lies within the verse and can be shown from the arrangement:

  • The second half of the verse itself states the conclusion to be drawn from the first: ulāʾika mubarraʾūna mimmā yaqūlūn"they are free of what is said." The point the sentence arrives at, that is, is not the classifying of anyone; it is the announcing of the invalidity of something that has been said.
  • And the verse comes at the end of a whole section (11-26). The subject of that section, from beginning to end, is what it is to lay down a ruling about people without evidence.

To use the verse in order to divide people into two groups, then, is the very thing the section it stands in forbids.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the second half of the verse.

And there is one further practical consequence: to establish which group a person falls into, the condition of proof the sūra itself has laid down (four witnesses, 24/4 and 24/13) is required. The verse, that is, cannot be read apart from the sūra's own procedure.

خَبِيث — root خ-ب-ث

This root is analysed here for the first time in this commentary.

The sense the lexicographers record: a thing's being corrupt, foul, useless in its substance. Khubth — badness, filth. Khabath — the dross that rises to the top when a metal is melted, the part that is thrown away.

And this last usage gives the concrete picture of the root: the scum that rises to the surface when gold or silver is melted, and is discarded, is called khabath.

At the centre of the word, then, there is an idea of separating out: the part that separates under fire and is thrown away.

I record this as an observation about the root and add this: this picture in the word agrees with the structure of the verse's sentence. The verse describes a separation — but does not say how the separation comes about.

طَيِّب — root ط-ي-ب

This root was analysed at al-Baqara, 2/168; I rely on that treatment. The note there: what is pleasant, clean, good; the word answers both to what is pleasant to the senses and to what is clean in its substance.

The opposition of the two roots:

خ-ب-ثط-ي-ب
Its concrete pictureDross — the scum that separates out in meltingWhat is pleasant — of taste, of smell, of substance
What it looks atThe corruption of the substanceThe cleanness of the substance
Its field in the QurʾānProperty, speech, deed, personProperty, speech, deed, person, place

That both roots are used in the same fields is one of the reasons for the indefiniteness in the verse. The words do not, by themselves, settle what they are adjectives of.

مُبَرَّءُونَ — "those who are held clear"

Root: ب-ر-أ. Its concrete sense is to part from a thing, to slip free of it, to be delivered. Barāʾa — a slipping free of an obligation. Bāriʾ — the Maker (who separates a thing out of nothing); this name was taken up at al-Ḥashr, 59/24. Bariʾa mina'l-maraḍ — he recovered from the illness.

The form is worth noting: mubarraʾūn — the passive participle of Form II.

It is not said "they cleared themselves". It is said "they have been held clear". The agent is not named, but it is understood from the sentence's context.

And this is the answer given to the matter of buhtān in the sixteenth verse, and I record it as my own reading:

It was recorded there: the one slandered cannot defend himself, because a thing that did not happen leaves no trace. The twenty-sixth verse takes that defence out of the man's hands and puts it elsewhere: the passive voice.

Acquittal, that is, comes not by being proved but by being announced.

مِمَّا يَقُولُونَ — "of what they say"

The verse names in a single word the thing they are held clear of: mā yaqūlūn — "what they say".

At the end of the section, that is, the whole matter is reduced to one word: speech.

And this forms a ring with the section's opening:

VerseExpression
11jāʾū bi'l-ifk — they brought the slander
15taqūlūna bi-afwāhikum — you say with your mouths
16an natakallama bi-hādhā — to speak of this
26mimmā yaqūlūnof what they say

The same root (ق-و-ل) three times in the section, and the section closes with it.

I record this as an observation about the word order.

لَهُم مَّغْفِرَةٌ وَرِزْقٌ كَرِيمٌ — the close

The section closes with two promises: maghfira and rizqun karīm.

كَرِيم — root ك-ر-م: precious, generous, noble. The word was analysed at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/13 (akramakum).

And the placing of the word rizq here is worth noting. The subject of the section was a matter of standing; at its close a word of material favour comes. In the classical commentaries it is recorded that the attribute karīm qualifies the kind of the provision: provision given without being kept waiting for, without reproach, without deficiency.


24/27

يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ لَا تَدْخُلُوا۟ بُيُوتًا غَيْرَ بُيُوتِكُمْ حَتَّىٰ تَسْتَأْنِسُوا۟ وَتُسَلِّمُوا۟ عَلَىٰٓ أَهْلِهَا ذَٰلِكُمْ خَيْرٌ لَّكُمْ لَعَلَّكُمْ تَذَكَّرُونَ

Yā ayyuhā'lladhīna āmanū lā tadkhulū buyūtan ghayra buyūtikum ḥattā tastaʾnisū wa tusallimū ʿalā ahlihā, dhālikum khayrun lakum laʿallakum tadhakkarūn

"O you who believe, do not enter houses other than your own until you have gained leave by establishing familiarity and by greeting their people. That is better for you, that you may take heed."

The opening of the block and its place in the sūra

With the twenty-seventh verse the sūra passes into a new block, and the passage is marked by an address: yā ayyuhā'lladhīna āmanū.

And the block is the exact counterpart of the block before it.

The verses from eleven to twenty-six took as their subject a word's entering into a person's privacy. The twenty-seventh verse takes up the same matter on the physical plane: a body's entering into a house.

BlockThe boundary of whatThe instrument of violation
11-26The boundary of standingSpeech
27-29The boundary of the houseThe body
30-31The boundary of the bodyThe glance

Three blocks, three distinct boundaries and three distinct instruments of violation. The sūra repeats the same idea on three planes.

I record this as my own reading; the subjects of the blocks and their order stand in the text.

And this is the direct continuation of the matter of privacy recorded in the section on the sūra in al-Ḥujurāt. Two notes were entered there:

In the discussion of 49/4: "a physical boundary can be crossed by a voice. A door may be shut and a man may still disturb the one inside. Privacy is not kept by a wall alone; it is kept by the wall's being respected." In the discussion of 49/12: "The sūra takes up privacy twice: in the fourth verse as a physical boundary, in the twelfth as a boundary of knowledge."

al-Nūr takes up the same two layers — but reverses the order: first the boundary of knowledge (11-26), then the physical boundary (27-29).

And al-Nūr adds a third layer: the glance, which is not in al-Ḥujurāt (30-31).

49. al-Ḥujurāt24. al-Nūr
Physical boundary49/4-5 — calling from behind the chambers24/27-29 — entering a house without leave
Boundary of knowledge49/12 — prying24/4, 12-19 — an unproved claim and its spreading
Boundary of the glance24/30-31
The name of the boundaryḥujurāt (ح-ج-ر — to enclose)buyūt (ب-ي-ت — the place where one passes the night)
The form of the commandWait (ṣabarū, 49/5)Ask leave (tastaʾnisū, 24/27)

The two sūras complete each other, and I record this table as my own reading; the places and subjects of the verses stand in the text.

بُيُوتًا غَيْرَ بُيُوتِكُمْ — the choice of the word

بَيْت — root ب-ي-ت. Its concrete sense is to pass the night. Bāta — he passed the night; bayāt — a passing of the night. And bayt — the place where the night is passed.

That the word comes from this root is worth noting, and I record it as an observation about the root: in Arabic a house is named not "the place one dwells in" or "the place one is protected in" but "the place where one passes the night".

And the night is the time when a man is least protected. The sūra's fifty-eighth verse will regulate this separately: three times will be enumerated at which leave must be asked, and two of them will have to do with the night.

I record this connection as my own reading; the sense of the root stands in the dictionary.

And the wording of the expression is worth noting: buyūtan ghayra buyūtikum — "houses other than your houses".

The verse does not say "do not enter another's house"; it says "houses other than your own". The boundary, that is, is drawn not by ownership but by a person's own domain. And buyūtikum is plural: a man may have more than one house, or the address is directed at the community.

تَسْتَأْنِسُوا۟ — the root أ-ن-س and growing warm

This is the most striking word in the verse and will be taken up here in detail.

Root: أ-ن-س. The root was analysed at al-Qaṣaṣ, 28/29; I rely on that treatment. The note there:

ءَانَسَ — root أ-ن-س: to catch sight of, to grow warm. From the same root come ins (man) and uns (familiarity). The lexicographers record the word's sense of "to sense a light from afar".

The derivatives of the root:

WordSense
إِنْس (ins)Man — the name of the kind
إِنْسَان (insān)A human being
أُنْس (uns)Familiarity, growing warm, becoming used to
أَنِيس (anīs)One with whom a man grows warm, a companion
ٱسْتِئْنَاس (istiʾnās)To seek familiarity; and to ask leave
مُسْتَأْنِسAccustomed, warmed to

And now the verse's most important question: why is the verb of asking leave chosen from this root?

In Arabic there is a direct verb for "to ask leave": istaʾdhana (root: أ-ذ-ن). And the sūra uses this verb in many places: in the twenty-eighth verse (yuʾdhana lakum), in the fifty-eighth (li-yastaʾdhinkum), in the fifty-ninth (fa'l-yastaʾdhinū), in the sixty-second (ḥattā yastaʾdhinūh).

But in the twenty-seventh verse — that is, in the first and founding command — this verb is not used. Tastaʾnisū is used.

This is the most important point in the verse in point of language, and it has been dwelt on in the classical commentaries too.

What the roots of the two verbs say:

VerbRootThe concrete sense of the rootWhat it conveys
ٱسْتَأْذَنَأ-ذ-نThe ear (udhun) — to hear, to give leaveA request for leave — the asking of a permission
ٱسْتَأْنَسَأ-ن-سTo grow warm, to establish familiarityThe seeking of familiarity — the making of a relation

And the difference is this, which I record as my own reading:

Istiʾdhān runs one way: one party asks, the other gives or does not give. It is a transaction.

Istiʾnās runs both ways: in its root there is a mutual growing warm. To stand at the door and ask leave is not enough; the one behind the door must also not be discomposed.

The verse, that is, frames the act of asking leave not as a procedure but as a relation.

And its concrete counterpart is recorded thus in the classical commentaries — I transmit them as explanations that are transmitted:

ExplanationIts content
1Istiʾnās is the making of one's arrival known: coughing, letting one's footfall be heard, calling out — giving the one inside the chance to make ready
2Istiʾnās is the asking of leave itself; the word is used in that sense
3Istiʾnās is trying to gather from the state of the one inside whether entry is fitting

I impose no preference. But what the three explanations have in common is worth noting: all of them include the visitor's making himself known beforehand.

And the measure recorded at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/4-5, is completed here:

There those who called out were censured — because there was no waiting. And what was commanded there was patience: wa law annahum ṣabarū ḥattā takhruja ilayhim.

al-Nūr 24/27 regulates the other side of the same matter: there what was censured was calling out from behind the wall; here what is commanded is establishing familiarity before the door.

The difference between the two verses lies in the direction of the voice, and I record this as my own reading:

al-Ḥujurāt 49/4al-Nūr 24/27
Whose the voice isThe one outside — forcing the insideThe one outside — making himself known
Its purposeTo bring out the one insideTo give the one inside a chance to make ready
The rulingAktharuhum lā yaʿqilūnDhālikum khayrun lakum

The same act (making a sound), with two different intentions, receives two opposite rulings. The difference lies in whom the sound is made for.

وَتُسَلِّمُوا۟ عَلَىٰٓ أَهْلِهَا — the greeting

سَلَّمَ — root س-ل-م. Its concrete sense is to be sound, entire, without flaw. Salāma — being clear of harm. Salām — a noun from this root.

And the function of the greeting here is worth recording: a greeting is an address, and it is the acknowledgement of a person's existence.

The two verbs the verse asks for, then, do two distinct works:

VerbRootWhat it does
tastaʾnisūأ-ن-سTo make oneself known — to announce one's arrival
tusallimūس-ل-مTo acknowledge the other — to greet his presence

The one looks towards oneself, the other towards the one opposite.

And the verb from the root س-ل-م will return twice more in the sūra: in the sixty-first verse, fa-sallimū ʿalā anfusikum — "greet yourselves". There is a ring between the two verses, and it will be taken up at the sixty-first.

حَتَّىٰ — the definiteness of the boundary

The particle is worth noting: ḥattā — "until". In Arabic this particle conveys a limit (ghāya).

The prohibition, that is, lasts up to a certain point, and when that point comes it is lifted. The prohibition is not absolute but conditional.

And the same particle is repeated through the sūra:

VerseWhat ḥattā attaches to
27ḥattā tastaʾnisū wa tusallimū — until you have established familiarity and greeted
28ḥattā yuʾdhana lakum — until leave is given you
33ḥattā yughniyahumu'llāhu min faḍlih — until God enriches them of His bounty
62ḥattā yastaʾdhinūh — until they ask leave of him

In all four usages the particle conveys a waiting. I record this as an observation about the word order.

ذَٰلِكُمْ خَيْرٌ لَّكُمْ لَعَلَّكُمْ تَذَكَّرُونَ — a ring with the first verse

The verse-ending is the same as that of the sūra's first verse: laʿallakum tadhakkarūn.

This verse-ending occurs twice in the sūra: at 1 and at 27. And both occurrences stand in verses that open a distinct block of the sūra.

I record this as an observation about the word order; the places of the verse-endings can be counted in the text.

And the expression khayrun lakum is worth noting too. The same expression occurred in the eleventh verse: bal huwa khayrun lakum. In both places it is said that something hard for the addressee is for his own good.

What this says to the present

One. The root of the verb of asking leave.

The root the verse chooses — uns, to grow warm — settles what asking leave is: not a transaction but a relation.

The practical counterpart of this is that leave may be asked and given in form, and yet what the verse asks for may not have come about. To knock at a door and walk in is different from knocking at a door and waiting for the one inside to be ready.

Two. Where the boundary lies.

The verse sets the door of the house as a boundary. And as was recorded at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/4, a man's door today is not only the door of his house:

"His telephone, his message box, the end of his working hours, his day off — each of these is a chamber: an enclosed, separated space."

What al-Nūr 24/27 adds is what is to be done in entering that space: first make yourself known, then greet the other, then wait for leave. Three steps, and all three before entering.

Three. And the addressee of the command.

The verse does not tell the householder "lock your door". It tells the one entering "ask leave". The obligation lies not with the one who needs protecting but with the one who approaches the boundary.

This is the same logic recorded at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/6: there too the obligation lay not with the one who spread the report but with the one who received it. Both sūras place the obligation upon the party whose behaviour is in his own hands.


24/28

فَإِن لَّمْ تَجِدُوا۟ فِيهَآ أَحَدًا فَلَا تَدْخُلُوهَا حَتَّىٰ يُؤْذَنَ لَكُمْ وَإِن قِيلَ لَكُمُ ٱرْجِعُوا۟ فَٱرْجِعُوا۟ هُوَ أَزْكَىٰ لَكُمْ وَٱللَّهُ بِمَا تَعْمَلُونَ عَلِيمٌ

Fa-in lam tajidū fīhā aḥadan fa-lā tadkhulūhā ḥattā yuʾdhana lakum, wa in qīla lakumu'rjiʿū fa'rjiʿū, huwa azkā lakum, wa'llāhu bimā taʿmalūna ʿalīm

"If you find no one in them, do not enter until leave is given you. And if you are told 'go back', then go back; that is more purifying for you. God knows what you do."

Two possibilities, two rulings

The verse fills the two gaps the twenty-seventh left:

PossibilityRuling
No one is in the houseDo not enter — until leave is given
You are told "go back"Go back

And what the two rulings have in common is worth recording: in both, the prohibition rests upon an absence of answer or upon a refusal.

The first possibility looks unnecessary at first: if there is no one, there is no one to give leave either; so what is there to wait for?

But the verse's logic is this, and I record it as my own reading: the twenty-seventh verse had commanded the asking of leave. And a man who gets no answer is inclined to count leave as given — "there is no one, so I may go in". The verse closes off that inference.

Silence, that is, is not leave. This is a concrete note that can be read from the arrangement.

وَإِن قِيلَ لَكُمُ ٱرْجِعُوا۟ فَٱرْجِعُوا۟ — accepting the refusal

The second half of the verse does something finer than the first, and its arrangement is worth noting.

The same verb occurs twice: irjiʿū (go back) and fa'rjiʿū (then go back). The one is the word spoken, the other the command given.

The verse, that is, puts the householder's word directly in the place of a ruling. No ground is asked for, no reason is required, no insistence is made.

And this is a thing worth recording: the verse lays no obligation upon the householder to "say why". The refusal is valid without being explained.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is that the verse lays down no condition of a reason.

هُوَ أَزْكَىٰ لَكُمْ — purification

The root ز-ك-و was analysed at the twenty-first verse. Its concrete sense: to increase, to grow; and to be cleansed.

The form is an elative: azkā — "more purifying, cleaner". And the other side of the comparison is not stated: more purifying than what?

The rule the classical lexicographers record is this: the omission of the compared term after an elative leaves the comparison wide. "Than insisting", "than being hurt", "than resenting" — all fall within its scope.

And the placing of the word azkā here says something worth recording, which I give as my own reading:

To be turned back from a door touches a man's pride. And the verse gives this situation the name of a purification. Going back, that is, is placed not as something lost but as something gained.

And the same word will come again two verses later: dhālika azkā lahum (30) — the outcome of lowering the glance. Both commands are commands to hold back, and both are rewarded with the same word.

VerseWhat is held back fromThe outcome
28Insisting — at the doorazkā lakum
30The glanceazkā lahum

I record this parallel as my own reading; the sameness of the words is the wording of the text.

وَٱللَّهُ بِمَا تَعْمَلُونَ عَلِيمٌ — the verse-ending

The verse-ending is almost the same as that of al-Ḥujurāt, 49/18: wa'llāhu baṣīrun bimā taʿmalūn.

The difference is a single word: al-Ḥujurāt has baṣīr (seeing), al-Nūr ʿalīm (knowing).

SūraVerse-endingThe divine name
al-Ḥujurāt 49/18wa'llāhu baṣīrun bimā taʿmalūnSeeing
al-Nūr 24/28wa'llāhu bimā taʿmalūna ʿalīmKnowing

And the difference agrees with the subject of the two sūras, and I record this as my own reading:

The last verse of al-Ḥujurāt took as its subject a man's claim about himself — something that cannot be told apart from outside. There baṣīr is fitting: the one who sees what is not seen.

al-Nūr 24/28 takes as its subject something that happens before a door — a moment no one sees: the door is knocked at, no answer comes, and the man decides alone what to do. There ʿalīm is fitting: the one who knows what is not known.

This is not a claim of preference but an observation of reading.


24/29

لَّيْسَ عَلَيْكُمْ جُنَاحٌ أَن تَدْخُلُوا۟ بُيُوتًا غَيْرَ مَسْكُونَةٍ فِيهَا مَتَٰعٌ لَّكُمْ وَٱللَّهُ يَعْلَمُ مَا تُبْدُونَ وَمَا تَكْتُمُونَ

Laysa ʿalaykum junāḥun an tadkhulū buyūtan ghayra maskūnatin fīhā matāʿun lakum, wa'llāhu yaʿlamu mā tubdūna wa mā taktumūn

"There is no fault in your entering houses that are not lived in, in which there is something of use to you. God knows what you make public and what you conceal."

The logic of the exception

The verse brings an exception to the prohibition laid down two verses before, and the exception has two conditions:

ConditionExpressionWhat it conveys
1ghayra maskūnaNot lived in — no one's life is within it
2fīhā matāʿun lakumSomething of yours is in it — there is a reason to enter

And that the two conditions are required together is worth noting. The first alone is not enough: it is not said that every uninhabited house may be entered. The second condition asks for a reason.

I record this as an observation about the word order.

مَسْكُون — root س-ك-ن

Root: س-ك-ن. Its concrete sense is the stopping of motion, coming to rest. Sakana — it stopped, it grew still. Sakīna — tranquillity. Maskūn — dwelt in, inhabited. Sakīna and sukūn are from the same root.

And the choice of the word gives a definition: what makes a place a "house" is someone's coming to rest within it.

The verse's exception, that is, looks not at a building but at a life. Not every structure with walls is a protected space; what is protected is someone living there.

I record this as my own reading; the sense of the root stands in the dictionary.

جُنَاح — root ج-ن-ح

Root: ج-ن-ح. Its concrete sense is to lean, to incline to one side. Janāḥ — a wing (the limb that folds to the side of the body). Janaḥa — he inclined.

And junāḥ: a straying from the right road by leaning aside; whence "fault, objection, blame".

The picture in the root of the word is worth noting: junāḥ is a swerving aside from the straight road. Its first sense, that is, is an error of direction, not a weight.

And the word occurs four times in the sūra:

VerseClauseWhat is lifted
29laysa ʿalaykum junāḥun an tadkhulūEntering a house that is not lived in
58laysa ʿalaykum wa lā ʿalayhim junāḥun baʿdahunnaAsking leave outside the three times
60fa-laysa ʿalayhinna junāḥunElderly women's laying aside the outer garment
61laysa ʿalaykum junāḥun an taʾkulūEating together or apart

All four usages are the lifting of an obligation. And all four stand in the sūra's blocks of manners.

This is a characteristic of the sūra, and I record it as my own reading: in laying down rules of manners the sūra writes beside every rule the place where that rule does not apply. A rule is set, and then the rule's limit is set.

وَٱللَّهُ يَعْلَمُ مَا تُبْدُونَ وَمَا تَكْتُمُونَ — the verse-ending

Two verbs stand face to face:

أَبْدَىٰ — root ب-د-و: to come out into the open, to appear. Bādī — appearing; badā — it came out. The root will return in the thirty-first verse: lā yubdīna zīnatahunn — "let them not display their adornment". The same verb, in the same form.

كَتَمَ — root ك-ت-م: to hide, to conceal, to keep within.

And the placing of the verse-ending here enters a note upon the whole block.

The block was speaking of a physical boundary: the door, the house, the entering. And the verse-ending names the thing behind the physical boundary: intention.

The verse says this: the form of what is done before the door is visible; the purpose behind that act is not. And the party that holds the measure knows them both.

I record this as my own reading; the opposition of the two verbs is the wording of the text.


24/30

قُل لِّلْمُؤْمِنِينَ يَغُضُّوا۟ مِنْ أَبْصَٰرِهِمْ وَيَحْفَظُوا۟ فُرُوجَهُمْ ذَٰلِكَ أَزْكَىٰ لَهُمْ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ خَبِيرٌۢ بِمَا يَصْنَعُونَ

Qul li'l-muʾminīna yaghuḍḍū min abṣārihim wa yaḥfaẓū furūjahum, dhālika azkā lahum, inna'llāha khabīrun bimā yaṣnaʿūn

"Say to the believing men that they lower part of their glances and guard their chastity. That is more purifying for them. God is aware of what they do."

First, a note of method

This verse and the one that follows are among the places in this commentary that must be written with the greatest care. I therefore write at the outset what is not done:

  • No legal ruling is issued. The rulings drawn from these two verses diverge among the schools and within each school. The disagreements are transmitted, none is preferred, and none is binding.
  • No current controversy and no politics is entered. How these verses are applied today, who does what, and the public arguments around it are not the subject of this text.
  • The reader is not scolded. These verses are among the places that have produced the most scolding in the language of preaching. This section does not do that.

What will be treated: the roots of the words, their forms, the particles, and the word order.

The first observation on the arrangement: the command is given to the men first

The thirtieth verse addresses men, the thirty-first women. And that is the order.

This is a fact that can be verified from the text and needs recording. In the tradition of commentary and of preaching the subject has been taken up mainly by way of the thirty-first verse. But the text's own order is this: the command is given to the men first.

And the first clauses of the two verses are word for word the same:

24/30 (to the men)24/31 (to the women)
The addressqul li'l-muʾminīnwa qul li'l-muʾmināt
The first commandyaghuḍḍū min abṣārihimyaghḍuḍna min abṣārihinna
The second commandwa yaḥfaẓū furūjahumwa yaḥfaẓna furūjahunna

The first two commands, in both verses, are the same verb, the same form, the same particle. The only difference is the gender of the pronoun.

And the thirty-first verse continues from there; the thirtieth does not. This difference will be taken up at the thirty-first verse.

I offer no interpretation of the order itself; this is the text's order, and I content myself with recording it. As an observation about the word order this may be said: the pair of verses does not frame the regulating of the glance as a one-sided obligation.

يَغُضُّوا۟ — the root غ-ض-ض

Root: غ-ض-ض. This root was analysed at Luqmān, 31/19, and at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/3; I rely on those treatments.

The note in Luqmān: "The root غ-ض-ض: to lessen, to reduce, to lower."

The note in al-Ḥujurāt (49/3yaghuḍḍūna aṣwātahum): there the word was used of the voice.

The concrete sense of the root: to lessen the amount, the force or the loudness of a thing. In Arabic the word is used both of the voice and of the glance. And ghaḍīḍ — fresh, tender (not yet fully opened).

And the verse's choice of word is worth recording:

In Arabic there are verbs for "to shut the eye" (ghamaḍa), for "not to look" (lā yanẓur), for "to turn one's face away" (aʿraḍa). The verse uses none of them.

The verb it uses is a verb of lessening.

مِنْ أَبْصَٰرِهِمْ — the particle min and the partitive

This is the most important point in the verse in point of language, and exactly the same structure was treated in Luqmān.

The note at Luqmān 31/19 was this:

And the particle is worth recording: ighḍuḍ min ṣawtik — "lower part of your voice". Here min conveys the partitive (a part of it). The verse, that is, asks not for silence but for the lowering of part of the voice.

And at al-Nūr 24/30 the same verb comes with the same particle and in the same structure: yaghuḍḍū min abṣārihim.

A comparison of the two verses:

Luqmān 31/19al-Nūr 24/30-31
The verbighḍuḍ (imperative)yaghuḍḍū / yaghḍuḍna (jussive — with the force of a command)
The rootغ-ض-ضغ-ض-ض
The particlemin — partitivemin — partitive
The objectṣawtikthe voiceabṣārihimthe glance
What is askedNot silence, but the lowering of part of the voiceNot blindness, but the lowering of part of the glance
What is not askedThe cutting off of the voice altogetherThe shutting of the eye altogether
The contextThe manners of walking and of speaking in generalThe manners of looking at one another

That the two verses use the same pattern is a fact that can be verified from the text. And the conclusion that follows from it is this:

The Qurʾān uses the root غ-ض-ض twice, for two different senses, with the same particle. And in both places what it commands is not a cutting off but a measure.

I record this as my own reading; the structure and the particle of the two verses are the wording of the text and can be compared.

And about the function of the particle min there is more than one explanation in the classical sources, and it needs transmitting:

ExplanationIts content
1. Partitive"A part of it" — not the whole of the glance but a part of it is lowered
2. RedundantThe particle adds no sense; the expression means "let them lower their glances"
3. It conveys a starting pointA lowering that begins from the glance

In most of the classical commentaries the first explanation is preferred, and the ground given is this: the scope of the ruling is limited; not every glance but a particular kind of glance is meant. I transmit this explanation as a view that is widely transmitted. I impose no preference, and it is not binding.

But the comparison with Luqmān 31/19 provides a ground: there the same particle was used with the same verb, and there it is plain that "cutting off the voice altogether" is not meant — for that verse is regulating the manners of speech. That the two structures are the same suggests the same function.

I record this as an observation of comparison; not as a ruling.

بَصَر — the glance, or sight?

Root: ب-ص-ر. Its concrete sense is to see; and to see in such a way as to grasp a thing. Baṣīra is from the same root. Baṣar — the sense of sight, and the glance.

That the word comes in the plural is worth noting: abṣār. The verse speaks, that is, not of a single glance but of the whole of one's glances.

And the word's distribution through the sūra builds a weave:

VerseExpressionWhat
30yaghuḍḍū min abṣārihimThe lowering of the glance
31yaghḍuḍna min abṣārihinnaThe lowering of the glance
37tataqallabu fīhi'l-qulūbu wa'l-abṣārThe day when hearts and eyes will be turned about
40lam yakad yarāhāSo dark that he can hardly see his hand
43yakādu sanā barqihī yadhhabu bi'l-abṣārThe flash of the lightning all but takes away the sight
44la-ʿibratan li-uli'l-abṣārA lesson for those who have eyes

The word occurs six times in the sūra, and four of them after the thirty-fifth verse.

This distribution says something, which I record as my own reading: the sūra first narrows the glance (30-31), then shows what is to be looked at (35), then tells of the limits of the eye (40, 43), and at the end names those who can see (44).

The sūra, that is, has a weave built upon the eye. And this is one of the sides that explain why the sūra's name is nūr.

وَيَحْفَظُوا۟ فُرُوجَهُمْ — the second command, and the absence of the particle

In the second command there is no min. And this is the most striking difference in the arrangement.

CommandParticleScope
yaghuḍḍū min abṣārihimPresent — partitivePartial
wa yaḥfaẓū furūjahumAbsentAbsolute

This difference has been dwelt on in the classical commentaries, and the explanation transmitted is this: the first command is partial because looking is a necessary part of life; the second is absolute because there is no such necessity there.

I transmit this explanation as a view that is transmitted. The one certain thing is that the particle is present in the one and absent in the other, and this is the wording of the text.

حَفِظَ — root ح-ف-ظ: to guard, to preserve, to watch over. Ḥāfiẓ — one who guards. Ḥifẓ — guarding; and memorising (the keeping and preserving of a text).

فُرُوج — root ف-ر-ج: its concrete sense is a gap, an opening, the space between two things. Furja — a rift, a space. The word is used in the Qurʾān of rifts in the sky as well: mā lahā min furūj (Qāf 50/6) — "it has no rifts at all".

The use of the word in this context is a figure of indirect speech, and the primary sense of the root is "a gap". The verse does not use the name of an organ directly.

I record this as an observation about the style: all the words the sūra uses in this discussion are indirect — furūj (a gap), zīna (adornment), ʿawrāt (the places left open). The text does not use the words of the domain it regulates.

ذَٰلِكَ أَزْكَىٰ لَهُمْ — purification

The same word occurred two verses earlier (28). The root ز-ك-و: to increase, and to be cleansed.

And the placing of the word here shows how the command is positioned.

The verse ends the command not as a prohibition but as a benefit. The one addressed is named not as the party that suffers a loss but as the party that gains: azkā lahum — "more purifying for them".

And it may be recalled that the command ighḍuḍ min ṣawtik at Luqmān, 31/19, also came within a list of counsels, in the setting of a father's advice. In both verses the command is grounded not on the threat of a penalty but on the man's own good.

I record this as an observation about the style.

إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ خَبِيرٌۢ بِمَا يَصْنَعُونَ — the choice of the verb

One word in the verse-ending draws attention: yaṣnaʿūn — "what they do".

صَنَعَ — root ص-ن-ع: its concrete sense is to do a thing with skill, by arranging it. Ṣanʿa, ṣunʿ, maṣnaʿ (a factory) are from the same root. The word conveys not a random act but a work that has been contrived.

And the Qurʾān uses yaṣnaʿūn here instead of taʿmalūn (you do). This difference is worth recording.

VerbRootWhat it conveys
عَمِلَع-م-لTo do, in general
صَنَعَص-ن-عTo do with skill, by arranging

And, as was recorded in al-Ḥujurāt, the choice of verb in a sūra's verse-endings agrees with its subject. The verb chosen here implies that a glance is not a random movement: a glance is most often a contrived movement — where, when, how much.

I record this as my own reading; the sense of "skill" in the root of the word stands in the dictionary.


24/31

وَقُل لِّلْمُؤْمِنَٰتِ يَغْضُضْنَ مِنْ أَبْصَٰرِهِنَّ وَيَحْفَظْنَ فُرُوجَهُنَّ وَلَا يُبْدِينَ زِينَتَهُنَّ إِلَّا مَا ظَهَرَ مِنْهَا وَلْيَضْرِبْنَ بِخُمُرِهِنَّ عَلَىٰ جُيُوبِهِنَّ وَلَا يُبْدِينَ زِينَتَهُنَّ إِلَّا لِبُعُولَتِهِنَّ أَوْ ءَابَآئِهِنَّ … وَتُوبُوٓا۟ إِلَى ٱللَّهِ جَمِيعًا أَيُّهَ ٱلْمُؤْمِنُونَ لَعَلَّكُمْ تُفْلِحُونَ

Wa qul li'l-muʾmināti yaghḍuḍna min abṣārihinna wa yaḥfaẓna furūjahunna wa lā yubdīna zīnatahunna illā mā ẓahara minhā, wa'l-yaḍribna bi-khumurihinna ʿalā juyūbihinna, wa lā yubdīna zīnatahunna illā li-buʿūlatihinna aw ābāʾihinna aw ābāʾi buʿūlatihinna aw abnāʾihinna aw abnāʾi buʿūlatihinna aw ikhwānihinna aw banī ikhwānihinna aw banī akhawātihinna aw nisāʾihinna aw mā malakat aymānuhunna awi'l-tābiʿīna ghayri uli'l-irbati mina'l-rijāli awi'l-ṭifli'lladhīna lam yaẓharū ʿalā ʿawrāti'l-nisāʾ, wa lā yaḍribna bi-arjulihinna li-yuʿlama mā yukhfīna min zīnatihinna, wa tūbū ila'llāhi jamīʿan ayyuha'l-muʾminūna laʿallakum tufliḥūn

"And say to the believing women that they lower part of their glances and guard their chastity, and that they not display their adornment save what appears of it. And let them draw their coverings over their bosoms. And let them not show their adornment to any but their husbands, their fathers, their husbands' fathers, their sons, their husbands' sons, their brothers, their brothers' sons, their sisters' sons, their own women, those their right hands possess, male attendants who have no need of women, or children not yet aware of women's nakedness. And let them not stamp their feet so that the adornment they conceal may be known. O believers, turn to God, all of you together, that you may prosper."

The structure of the verse

After repeating the two commands of the thirtieth verse, the verse adds four new provisions:

OrderExpressionIts subject
1yaghḍuḍna min abṣārihinnaThe glance — the same as in verse 30
2wa yaḥfaẓna furūjahunnaChastity — the same as in verse 30
3wa lā yubdīna zīnatahunna illā mā ẓahara minhāThe not displaying of adornment — the general provision
4wa'l-yaḍribna bi-khumurihinna ʿalā juyūbihinnaThe placing of the covering
5wa lā yubdīna zīnatahunna illā li-…The list of exceptions
6wa lā yaḍribna bi-arjulihinnaThe act of drawing attention
7wa tūbū ila'llāhi jamīʿanThe close — a call to turn to God

The verse is one of the longest in the sūra and contains six separate provisions.

زِينَة — root ز-ي-ن

Root: ز-ي-ن. Its concrete sense is to adorn, to make look fair. Zayn — adornment; zīna — adornment, ornament. Tazyīn — adorning.

The word occurred at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/7: wa zayyanahū fī qulūbikum — "and He made it fair in your hearts".

And there is broad disagreement over the scope of the word — this is one of the most disputed points in the verse.

إِلَّا مَا ظَهَرَ مِنْهَا — the exception that is disputed

This expression is one of those in the classical commentaries over which there is the greatest divergence of view, and the disagreement needs transmitting.

ظَهَرَ — root ظ-ه-ر: its concrete sense is the back (ẓahr); and from there, to appear, to come out into the open, to come out on top. The root was analysed at al-Aḥzāb, 33/4 (tuẓāhirūn).

And the main explanations of what mā ẓahara minhā — "what appears of it" — means are these:

ExplanationWhat mā ẓahara minhā isIts ground
1The outer garment — the clothing worn over and already visibleThe wording of the word: what is visible of itself
2The face and the handsThat covering these would in practice cause difficulty
3The part that appears of itself, without being meant toThat the verb is not passive: ẓahara — it appeared of itself
4The part that varies according to customThat the expression has been left indefinite

This disagreement takes up wide space in the classical literature of commentary and of jurisprudence; it diverges among the schools and within each school. In this section no preference is made, no legal ruling is issued, and none of these is binding.

What can be said with certainty is the linguistic structure of the expression, and I record it as an observation: the verb ẓahara is active and intransitive. That is, not "to show" but "to appear". And this suggests that the exception has to do not with a person's intention but with a thing's appearing of itself.

I give this as an observation about the language; not as a ruling.

وَلْيَضْرِبْنَ بِخُمُرِهِنَّ عَلَىٰ جُيُوبِهِنَّ — the dictionary senses of the words

This clause is the best known part of the verse, and the dictionary sense of two words is decisive.

خُمُر — the plural of khimār

Root: خ-م-ر. This root was analysed at Muḥammad, 47/15; I rely on that treatment. The note there:

خَمْر — root خ-م-ر: to cover, to hide. From the same root خِمَار (khimār) — a covering. And wine bears this name because it covers the mind.

The derivatives of the root:

WordSense
خَمْر (khamr)Wine — what covers the mind
خِمَار (khimār)A covering — especially one drawn over the head
خُمُر (khumur)The plural of khimār
خَمِيرَةLeaven — what is mixed into dough and hidden within it
مُخَامَرَةTo mix, to enter into

And there is a point that must be recorded about the concrete sense of the word:

Khimār, by its root, is "the thing that covers". The word became established in Arabic as the name of the cloth drawn over the head; the lexicographers and the exegetes agree on this sense.

And the note in the verse's arrangement is important: the verse does not command the wearing of a khimār.

The structure of the sentence is this: wa'l-yaḍribna bi-khumurihinna ʿalā juyūbihinna — "let them draw their coverings over their bosoms".

Khimār, that is, occurs in the sentence as an object already present — as a piece of clothing the addressees already have. What is commanded is not to acquire it but where to bring it.

This is an observation about the word order, read from the wording of the text: bi-khumurihinna — "with their own coverings". The possessive pronoun conveys that the object is already there.

And at this point a piece of historical information is widely transmitted in the classical commentaries, and I transmit it as information that is transmitted: in that period the ends of the khimār the women drew over their heads were thrown back, and the opening of the garment at the breast was left uncovered. What the verse commands is that the ends of the covering be brought forward, over the opening at the neck.

I transmit this as a historical note widely transmitted in the classical commentaries; I give no chain of transmission and no attribution to a source, because I cannot give one with certainty.

جُيُوب — the plural of jayb

Root: ج-ي-ب. The sense the lexicographers record: the opening at the neck and breast of a garment; the place the neck-opening leaves bare.

The word names the opening of a garment through which the head is passed and which runs down towards the breast. From the same root jawb — to pierce, to cut open; that is, a jayb is the cut place of a garment.

The Turkish cep ("pocket") comes from this word — an opening made in a garment.

And the Qurʾān uses the same word in another place: usluk yadaka fī jaybik (al-Qaṣaṣ 28/32; al-Naml 27/12) — "put your hand into your bosom". This verse was treated in al-Qaṣaṣ. There too the word conveys the neck-opening of a garment.

What the two words build together:

WordRootWhat
خِمَارخ-م-ر — to coverThe covering thing — already in hand
جَيْبج-ي-ب — to cut openThe place left open — the cut of the garment

The verse brings the covering thing over the place left open. This is the literal work of the sentence.

And the verb is worth noting: ḍaraba bi-… ʿalā — "to bring one thing down over another, to let it fall over it". The concreteness of the verb conveys the actual moving of the garment.

The rulings the schools have drawn

The rulings drawn from this verse diverge among the schools and within each school. The table below is meant to show at which points the divergence lies. None of them is this text's preference and none is binding.

The point of divergenceThe direction of the views transmitted
The scope of mā ẓahara minhāWhether the face and the hands fall within this exception; whether the outer garment is what is meant
Which parts the covering coversDifferent conclusions have been drawn regarding the head, the neck, the bosom and the feet
The scope of certain classes in the list of exceptionsWhom the expressions nisāʾihinna, mā malakat aymānuhunna and ghayri uli'l-irba include
The relation between covering in prayer and covering outside prayerThat the two discussions are taken up separately, and that their measures may differ
The role of custom and of necessityTo what extent the ruling depends upon custom and upon circumstances

This table is not a legal opinion and cannot be read as a guide to practice.

And one further note must be entered: the rulings drawn from this verse have been applied in different ways in different regions through history. This arises not from any vagueness in the verse but from the verse's leaving an exception such as mā ẓahara minhā indefinite, and from the place of the concept of ʿurf (custom) in jurisprudence. This is recorded as an observation; it leads to no preference.

The list of exceptions — an observation on the arrangement

The verse enumerates eleven classes. And the structure of the list is worth noting:

GroupWho
The spousebuʿūlatihinna
Kinship — upwardābāʾihinna, ābāʾi buʿūlatihinna
Kinship — downwardabnāʾihinna, abnāʾi buʿūlatihinna
Kinship — collateralikhwānihinna, banī ikhwānihinna, banī akhawātihinna
Womennisāʾihinna
The householdmā malakat aymānuhunna
Those without intental-tābiʿīna ghayri uli'l-irba, al-ṭifl

The last two items of the list give a measure, and I record this as an observation about the word order: ghayri uli'l-irba (those who have no need of women) and alladhīna lam yaẓharū ʿalā ʿawrāti'l-nisāʾ (children not yet aware of women's nakedness).

The list, that is, is not built on kinship alone; the last two items look at whether an intent is present or not.

إِرْبَة — root أ-ر-ب: need, want; and skill. There is disagreement in the classical sources over the sense of the word in this context, and I content myself with transmitting it.

The expression mā malakat aymānuhunna in the list names an institution belonging to the social structure of that period. The sūra's thirty-third verse will regulate the way out of that institution, and it will be taken up there.

وَلَا يَضْرِبْنَ بِأَرْجُلِهِنَّ — the act of drawing attention

This is one of the finest notes in the verse, and it is generally passed over.

The verb is the same as the verb in the fourth provision: ḍaraba. And the arrangement sets up a symmetry:

ProvisionVerbObjectIts direction
4wa'l-yaḍribna bi-khumurihinnaThe coveringA command
6wa lā yaḍribna bi-arjulihinnaThe feetA prohibition

The same verb, once as a command and once as a prohibition. This is a repetition that can be verified from the text, and I record it as an observation about the word order.

And the ground of the second prohibition is given in the verse: li-yuʿlama mā yukhfīna min zīnatihinna — "so that the adornment they conceal may be known".

What is forbidden, that is, is not the sound of the foot — it is the purpose. Not the act itself but why the act is done.

This says something about the verse as a whole, which I record as my own reading: when a rule of covering is laid down, it is possible to keep to the letter of the rule and get round its spirit. The verse closes off that possibility from within: every act that makes known what has been concealed falls within the scope of the command to conceal.

And this provision shows that the verse's ruling is framed not as a matter of outward appearance but as a matter of purpose.

وَتُوبُوٓا۟ إِلَى ٱللَّهِ جَمِيعًا — the rulings closing with a call to turn

The last sentence of the verse is the most striking place in this section and deserves separate treatment.

And the first observation is in the arrangement: the address changes.

The verse had come from beginning to end in the feminine plural: yaghḍuḍna, yaḥfaẓna, yubdīna, yaḍribna. And in the last clause the form changes: tūbū — a masculine plural imperative. And the addressee is named openly: ayyuha'l-muʾminūn — "O believers".

At the end of the commands given to women, that is, the verse opens the address to the whole of the community.

This is a fact that can be verified from the text and is recorded in the classical commentaries as well. And its consequence is this:

The addressees of the two verses (30-31) had been fixed separately; the close is shared.

VerseAddressee
30al-muʾminīn — men
31 (its beginning)al-muʾmināt — women
31 (its end)ayyuha'l-muʾminūnall of them

I record this as my own reading; the change of forms is the wording of the text and can be verified.

The second observation: that the commands close with a call to turn to God.

And this is a fact of style that must be recorded. After a series of provisions of manners the verse announces no penalty, sets no threat, offers no rebuke. It makes a call to turn.

Tawba, as in the twenty-second verse, is by its root a turning. Not a feeling but a movement.

And the scope of the call: jamīʿan — "all together". The call, that is, is not to those who fail to keep the command; it is to everyone.

Its meaning is worth dwelling on, and I record this as my own reading:

When a provision of manners is laid down, its commonest misuse is to turn it into an instrument of measurement. Who keeps it, who does not. And the verse closes off that possibility immediately after the provisions: the call is to everyone.

And the measure recorded in the section on the sūra in al-Ḥujurāt works here exactly:

"In all five places the same operation is performed: the measuring instrument is taken out of a man's hand."

The last sentence of al-Nūr 24/31 performs the same operation.

The third observation: the verse-ending.

Laʿallakum tufliḥūn — "that you may prosper". The root ف-ل-ح: its concrete sense is to split the soil, to till. Fallāḥ — a ploughman. And falāḥ: to split through and come out, to attain what one seeks.

The concrete sense of the root fits the close: for a seed to split the soil and come out, it must first stay under the soil. And the root ز-ك-و (in the thirtieth verse: azkā) came from the same field: to increase, to be fruitful.

Both roots come from the field of agriculture, and both convey the outcome of holding back.

I record this as an observation about the root.

What this says to the present

In this section the verse's place in today's controversies is not entered. The three things to be recorded come from the verse's own arrangement.

One. That the command is given to both sides.

The first two commands of the thirtieth verse and of the thirty-first are the same. This is a fact that can be verified from the text, and the text itself gives no room for the discussion to be taken up one-sidedly.

Two. The taking of purpose into the ruling.

The provision wa lā yaḍribna bi-arjulihinna li-yuʿlama mā yukhfīna closes off the possibility of keeping to the letter of a rule and getting round its spirit. And this provision makes it hard to read the ruling as a matter of outward form.

Three. And to whom the close is addressed.

Having enumerated the provisions, the verse opens the address to all the believers and calls them to turn to God. This is a barrier, set from within the text itself, against the verse's being used to measure a group.

All three of these notes are read from the wording of the text, and none of them announces a ruling upon either side.


24/32

وَأَنكِحُوا۟ ٱلْأَيَٰمَىٰ مِنكُمْ وَٱلصَّٰلِحِينَ مِنْ عِبَادِكُمْ وَإِمَآئِكُمْ إِن يَكُونُوا۟ فُقَرَآءَ يُغْنِهِمُ ٱللَّهُ مِن فَضْلِهِۦ وَٱللَّهُ وَٰسِعٌ عَلِيمٌ

Wa ankiḥu'l-ayāmā minkum wa'l-ṣāliḥīna min ʿibādikum wa imāʾikum, in yakūnū fuqarāʾa yughnihimu'llāhu min faḍlih, wa'llāhu wāsiʿun ʿalīm

"Marry off those among you who are unmarried, and those of your male and female slaves who are fit for it. If they are poor, God will enrich them of His bounty. God is of ample bounty, knowing."

The verse's place in the block

The thirty-second verse comes immediately after the thirtieth and thirty-first, and the arrangement is worth noting.

The two verses had given a command to hold back. The thirty-second gives a command to open a way.

VerseCommandIts direction
30-31Lower the glance, guard chastityHolding back
32Marry them offOpening a way

And this ordering carries a logic, which I record as my own reading: when a boundary is laid down, a way must also be opened that makes it possible to stay within it. The verse shows the way immediately after the restriction.

And the addressee of the command is worth noting: ankiḥū — a plural imperative. The address is not to the individual but to the community. It is not said to the one who wishes to marry, "marry"; it is said to the community, "marry them off".

The verse, that is, places what looks like an individual decision as a social responsibility.

ٱلْأَيَٰمَىٰ — root أ-ي-م

The plural of أَيِّم (ayyim). The sense the lexicographers record: one who has no spouse.

And the scope of the word matters: ayyim is used both of one who has never married and of one who has lost a spouse; and both of men and of women.

The word, that is, covers not one condition but every condition of "having no spouse at present". This is a scope the lexicographers record.

And that this word is chosen is worth noting: the verse does not use al-abzār or any other narrow word; it uses the inclusive one.

إِن يَكُونُوا۟ فُقَرَآءَ يُغْنِهِمُ ٱللَّهُ مِن فَضْلِهِۦ — the note about poverty

This is the most striking clause in the verse, because it meets an objection in advance.

The objection is plain and is the same in every age: "he has no means." The verse does not deny it; it accepts the poverty and ties the answer to somewhere else.

فَقِير — root ف-ق-ر: its concrete sense is the vertebra (faqar). The connection the lexicographers draw: a faqīr is one whose backbone is broken — one who cannot straighten his back. The root was taken up at Fāṭir, 35/15 (antumu'l-fuqarāʾu ila'llāh).

أَغْنَىٰ — root غ-ن-ي: to be without need, to suffice. Ghanī — one who needs no one.

And the conditional structure of the sentence is worth noting: in yakūnū … yughnihim. The answer of the condition is a promise, and the agent of the promise is God.

This is the place in the verse most open to misreading, and a note must be entered:

The sentence is not a formula of guarantee. The Qurʾān's general language about provision, as has been recorded at many places in this commentary (al-ʿAnkabūt 29/17, al-Shūrā 42/27), sets up no undertaking of accounts. What the verse does is to ask that poverty not be counted an obstacle by itself.

And the qualification min faḍlih supports this: the enriching is named as coming not from a man's own account but from bounty.

I record this as my own reading; the conditional structure of the sentence and the qualification min faḍlih are the wording of the text.

وَٱللَّهُ وَٰسِعٌ عَلِيمٌ

وَاسِع — root و-س-ع: breadth. The same root as al-saʿa in the twenty-second verse.

And the link between the two verses is worth noting: in the twenty-second verse it was man's breadth that was named (ulu'l-faḍli minkum wa'l-saʿa); in the thirty-second, God's. The same root, ten verses apart, with two different subjects.

I record this as an observation about the word order.


24/33

وَلْيَسْتَعْفِفِ ٱلَّذِينَ لَا يَجِدُونَ نِكَاحًا حَتَّىٰ يُغْنِيَهُمُ ٱللَّهُ مِن فَضْلِهِۦ وَٱلَّذِينَ يَبْتَغُونَ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ مِمَّا مَلَكَتْ أَيْمَٰنُكُمْ فَكَاتِبُوهُمْ إِنْ عَلِمْتُمْ فِيهِمْ خَيْرًا وَءَاتُوهُم مِّن مَّالِ ٱللَّهِ ٱلَّذِىٓ ءَاتَىٰكُمْ وَلَا تُكْرِهُوا۟ فَتَيَٰتِكُمْ عَلَى ٱلْبِغَآءِ إِنْ أَرَدْنَ تَحَصُّنًا لِّتَبْتَغُوا۟ عَرَضَ ٱلْحَيَوٰةِ ٱلدُّنْيَا وَمَن يُكْرِههُّنَّ فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ مِنۢ بَعْدِ إِكْرَٰهِهِنَّ غَفُورٌ رَّحِيمٌ

Wa'l-yastaʿfifi'lladhīna lā yajidūna nikāḥan ḥattā yughniyahumu'llāhu min faḍlih, wa'lladhīna yabtaghūna'l-kitāba mimmā malakat aymānukum fa-kātibūhum in ʿalimtum fīhim khayrā, wa ātūhum min māli'llāhi'lladhī ātākum, wa lā tukrihū fatayātikum ʿala'l-bighāʾi in aradna taḥaṣṣunan li-tabtaghū ʿaraḍa'l-ḥayāti'l-dunyā, wa man yukrihhunna fa-inna'llāha min baʿdi ikrāhihinna ghafūrun raḥīm

"And let those who find no means of marriage keep themselves chaste until God enriches them of His bounty. And if any of those your right hands possess seek a deed of manumission, make that deed with them if you know some good in them, and give them of the wealth of God that He has given you. And do not compel your slave-girls to prostitution, when they desire to keep chaste, in order to seek the passing goods of the life of this world. And whoever compels them — God, after their being compelled, is forgiving, merciful."

The verse's three distinct provisions

The long verse takes up three distinct subjects, and all three look at a situation of impossibility:

ProvisionWhose conditionWhat is done
1One who finds no means of marriageIstiʿfāf — waiting
2One who wishes to buy his freedomThe making of a deed is commanded
3One who is compelledCompulsion is forbidden

What the three have in common: all are about people in a position where they cannot change their own condition by themselves.

ٱسْتَعَفَّ — root ع-ف-ف

Root: ع-ف-ف. The sense the lexicographers record: to withdraw one's hand from a thing, to keep away from it; to hold oneself back. ʿIffa is from the same root.

The form: Form X — istaʿaffa: to strive to be chaste, to make an effort to hold oneself back.

And the choice of the form is worth noting: Form X conveys the seeking of a thing and the effort made for it. The verse does not say "be chaste"; it says "strive to stay chaste". The verb conveys an effort.

And the word will return in the sixtieth verse: wa an yastaʿfifna khayrun lahunn.

وَٱلَّذِينَ يَبْتَغُونَ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ — the deed of manumission

This is a place among the Qurʾān's social provisions that needs recording separately.

Kitāba (كِتَابَة) is the name of an institution in classical jurisprudence: a written contract made by a person of slave status with his owner, by which he gains his freedom in return for paying a fixed price.

And what the verse establishes has three stages:

StageExpressionWhat
1alladhīna yabtaghūna'l-kitābThe request comes from the person himself
2fa-kātibūhum in ʿalimtum fīhim khayrāThe command to make the deed — with a condition
3wa ātūhum min māli'llāhi'lladhī ātākumThe command to give property

The third stage is worth recording and draws attention: the person is not only granted the right to a deed; it is also commanded that property be given him so that he may pay the price of the deed.

The provision, that is, does not merely open the door of exit — it takes upon itself part of the cost of passing through the door.

I record this as an observation about the word order; the three stages are in the wording of the text.

And the expression min māli'llāhi'lladhī ātākum is worth noting: the property to be given is named not "your property" but "the wealth of God that He has given you". The source of ownership is called to mind.

Over the juristic details — the binding force of the deed, whether the command conveys obligation or recommendation, the amount of property to be given — there is disagreement among the schools. In this section no preference is made and none is binding.

And a historical note may be entered: in a world in which it found the institution of slavery already in place, the Qurʾān framed its provisions concerning it always in the direction of exit — the freeing of a slave in expiations, fi'l-riqāb among the categories of alms, and here kitāba. This is an observation that can be read from the text about the direction of the verses, and I record it as an observation; I do not present it as a historical assessment.

وَلَا تُكْرِهُوا۟ فَتَيَٰتِكُمْ عَلَى ٱلْبِغَآءِ — the prohibition of compulsion

The verse's third provision is the most concrete and the sternest.

أَكْرَهَ — root ك-ر-ه: to dislike; in Form IV: to make someone do what he dislikes, to compel. The root was analysed at al-Baqara, 2/256 (lā ikrāha fi'l-dīn); I rely on that treatment.

بِغَاء — root ب-غ-ي: the primary sense of the root is to want, to seek; and to overstep the bound. The root was analysed at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/9 (baghat iḥdāhumā).

And the sentence the verse builds must be read with care.

The qualification in aradna taḥaṣṣunan — "when they desire to keep chaste" — has been explained in the classical commentaries, and the explanation transmitted is this: the qualification is not a condition of the prohibition; it is a qualification describing the actual situation of that period. It does not mean "if they do not desire it, they may be compelled".

Two things are given as grounds, and both can be read from the text:

One. The logic of the sentence. Compulsion (ikrāh), by its very definition, can be applied only to someone who does not want. One does not "compel" a person who wants. To understand the qualification as a condition, then, contradicts the sentence's own word.

Two. The end of the sentence. Wa man yukrihhunna fa-inna'llāha min baʿdi ikrāhihinna ghafūrun raḥīm. The verse names the condition of the one compelled with forgiveness — that is, the compelled party is not held responsible for the act.

I transmit this explanation as one widely transmitted in the classical commentaries; and I record that both grounds can be read from the text.

تَحَصُّن — root ح-ص-ن: the same root as muḥṣanāt in the fourth verse. Protection like a fortress. That the word returns in the sūra is worth noting: in the fourth verse an attribute, here a will.

عَرَض ٱلْحَيَوٰةِ ٱلدُّنْيَا — "the passing goods"

عَرَض — root ع-ر-ض: breadth, width; and what does not last, what comes and goes. In the language of philosophy ʿaraḍ (accident) is the opposite of jawhar (substance): what cannot stand on its own, what is transient.

And the choice of the word carries a judgement: the gain that is the cause of the compulsion is named what does not last. What is got in return for what a person is subjected to is named ʿaraḍ.

I record this as an observation about the word.

فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ مِنۢ بَعْدِ إِكْرَٰهِهِنَّ غَفُورٌ رَّحِيمٌ — the close

Whom the verse-ending is directed at has been debated in the classical commentaries; but the explanation widely transmitted is that it is directed at the party compelled.

And the arrangement of the sentence supports this: min baʿdi ikrāhihinna — "after their being compelled". The pronoun is feminine, and the expression states the condition of the party compelled.

And the sense of "covering" in the root gh-f-r shows its work here again. In the fifth verse too the same pair of names came after a matter of laying something bare.


24/34

وَلَقَدْ أَنزَلْنَآ إِلَيْكُمْ ءَايَٰتٍ مُّبَيِّنَٰتٍ وَمَثَلًا مِّنَ ٱلَّذِينَ خَلَوْا۟ مِن قَبْلِكُمْ وَمَوْعِظَةً لِّلْمُتَّقِينَ

Wa laqad anzalnā ilaykum āyātin mubayyinātin wa mathalan mina'lladhīna khalaw min qablikum wa mawʿiẓatan li'l-muttaqīn

"We have surely sent down to you clear verses, and an example from those who passed away before you, and an admonition for those who guard themselves."

The seal of the block and the door of the next

This verse does two things at once, and its place in the arrangement is worth noting.

One. It closes the fourth block (27-34) — in the language of the first verse: anzalnā … āyātin mubayyināt. In the first verse it was anzalnā fīhā āyātin bayyināt. The same verb, the same object, a different adjectival form.

Two. And it says one word: mathal. The next verse is the sūra's most famous mathal.

مَثَلًا — the parable named in advance

مَثَل — root م-ث-ل: to resemble, to be an example. Mithl — a like; timthāl — an image. And mathal: a comparison framed in order to tell of something, an example.

And the placing of the word here opens the door of the thirty-fifth verse.

VerseThe root mathal
34wa mathalan mina'lladhīna khalaw
35mathalu nūrihī ka-mishkātin
35 (its end)wa yaḍribu'llāhu'l-amthāla li'l-nās
39ka-sarābin bi-qīʿa — (a comparison, but not the word)

The root three times, within two verses. And the last clause of the thirty-fifth verse says so outright: wa yaḍribu'llāhu'l-amthāla li'l-nās — "God coins likenesses for people".

I record this as an observation about the word order.

مُّبَيِّنَات — the difference of form

In the first verse bayyināt, here mubayyināt.

FormIts kindIts sense
بَيِّنَات (bayyināt)An assimilate adjectiveWhat is itself clear
مُبَيِّنَات (mubayyināt)The active participle of Form IIWhat makes clear, what makes plain

The difference is one of transitivity: the one conveys its own clarity, the other the work of making something else clear.

And in the classical sources on the variant readings it is also transmitted that the word is read mubayyanāt (a passive participle — "made clear"). Since I cannot state with certainty which reader read which, I write no names.

What the three forms together say may be recorded: the verses are clear in themselves, they make other things clear, and they have themselves been made clear.

I record this as an observation about the form.

Three things: āyāt, mathal, mawʿiẓa

The verse divides what has been sent down into three, and the addressee of each of the three differs:

WhatTo whomWhat it does
āyātin mubayyinātGeneralIt makes clear
mathalan mina'lladhīna khalawGeneralIt gives an example
mawʿiẓatan li'l-muttaqīnTo those who guard themselvesIt admonishes

And the narrowing of the third one's addressee is worth noting.

Mawʿiẓa — root و-ع-ظ; analysed at the seventeenth verse: reminding and holding back. And an admonition is an admonition only for one who will take it. The verse says this with a word: li'l-muttaqīn.

This agrees with a measure recorded in the classical commentaries: the same text does different work according to its addressee. It was recorded at al-Aḥqāf, 46/12: "the same text does two distinct works according to its addressee" — warning and glad tidings.


24/35

ٱللَّهُ نُورُ ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتِ وَٱلْأَرْضِ مَثَلُ نُورِهِۦ كَمِشْكَوٰةٍ فِيهَا مِصْبَاحٌ ٱلْمِصْبَاحُ فِى زُجَاجَةٍ ٱلزُّجَاجَةُ كَأَنَّهَا كَوْكَبٌ دُرِّىٌّ يُوقَدُ مِن شَجَرَةٍ مُّبَٰرَكَةٍ زَيْتُونَةٍ لَّا شَرْقِيَّةٍ وَلَا غَرْبِيَّةٍ يَكَادُ زَيْتُهَا يُضِىٓءُ وَلَوْ لَمْ تَمْسَسْهُ نَارٌ نُّورٌ عَلَىٰ نُورٍ يَهْدِى ٱللَّهُ لِنُورِهِۦ مَن يَشَآءُ وَيَضْرِبُ ٱللَّهُ ٱلْأَمْثَٰلَ لِلنَّاسِ وَٱللَّهُ بِكُلِّ شَىْءٍ عَلِيمٌ

Allāhu nūru'l-samāwāti wa'l-arḍ, mathalu nūrihī ka-mishkātin fīhā miṣbāḥ, al-miṣbāḥu fī zujāja, al-zujājatu ka-annahā kawkabun durriyyun yūqadu min shajaratin mubārakatin zaytūnatin lā sharqiyyatin wa lā gharbiyyatin yakādu zaytuhā yuḍīʾu wa law lam tamsashu nār, nūrun ʿalā nūr, yahdi'llāhu li-nūrihī man yashāʾ, wa yaḍribu'llāhu'l-amthāla li'l-nās, wa'llāhu bi-kulli shayʾin ʿalīm

"God is the light of the heavens and the earth. The likeness of His light is as a niche in which there is a lamp; the lamp within a glass; the glass as it were a star shining like a pearl, kindled from a blessed olive tree, neither of the east nor of the west, whose oil would almost give light though no fire had touched it. Light upon light. God guides to His light whom He wills. God coins likenesses for people. God knows everything."

A note about this verse

This verse is the centre of the sūra, and it is the most detailed part of this section.

The verse is one of those most written about in the history of Islamic thought: it has been taken up separately in the literatures of commentary, of theology, of philosophy and of Sufism, and independent treatises have been written on it.

What will be done in this section is this: the elements of the parable will be worked out one by one, what each of them does will be shown in a table, and the classical explanations of the first sentence will be transmitted together with their disagreements. No preference will be imposed and no binding ruling will be issued.

ٱللَّهُ نُورُ ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتِ وَٱلْأَرْضِ — a note of tanzīh

The verse's first sentence must be handled with care, and a note needs entering at the very start.

This expression cannot be understood in the sense of a bodily light.

The reason is established by the Qurʾān's own language, and it agrees with the series of tanzīh recorded at al-Baqara, 2/255 (the Verse of the Throne). There a series of ten clauses of tanzīh stood, and each clause removed a bodily or corporeal attribute. The verse is read together with the principle "there is nothing like Him" (al-Shūrā 42/11).

Light, in the physical sense, is a created thing. Indeed the Qurʾān states that light is created: wa jaʿala'l-ẓulumāti wa'l-nūr (al-Anʿām 6/1) — "and He made the darknesses and the light". What has been created cannot be the essence of the Creator.

This note is entered openly in the classical tradition of commentary as well. And the exegetes have taken different roads in explaining the expression.

The classical explanations of the first sentence

The main directions in the classical literature of commentary are these. None of them is preferred and none is binding:

DirectionThe sense of the expressionIts ground
1. Munawwir"God is the illuminator of the heavens and the earth" — a governed noun is understoodSuch an ellipsis is common in Arabic; and the rest of the verse says nūrihī (His light), thus ascribing the light to God — that is, the light is not the essence but something ascribed to the essence
2. The light of guidance"God is the source of guidance for the people of the heavens and the earth"The Qurʾān uses nūr again and again of guidance (al-Māʾida 5/15-16; al-Anʿām 6/122; al-Ṭalāq 65/11)
3. The source of being, that which makes manifest"The visibility and the being of everything is from Him"; as light makes things visibleAn explanation developed in the literature of theology and of philosophy, by way of the concept of ẓuhūr
4. TafwīḍThe sense of the expression is referred to God; its how is not entered intoThe general stance adopted with ambiguous verses

And all four are represented in the classical sources.

An observation about the word order may be recorded, and I give it as my own reading: the verse itself enters a qualification immediately after the first sentence: mathalu nūrihī — "the likeness of His light".

Directly after the first sentence, that is, the verse passes into the language of a mathal. And a mathal is, by definition, not the thing spoken of but a comparison framed in order to speak of it.

This means that the verse carries a note of tanzīh within itself: the text itself says that what it will describe is a likeness. And the last clause of the verse repeats it: wa yaḍribu'llāhu'l-amthāla li'l-nās.

Moreover the genitive in the expression nūrihī — "His light" — is worth noting: in the second clause the light is named as something ascribed to God. This provides a ground for the first and second explanations of how the first sentence is to be understood.

I record this as an observation about the word order; not as a preference.

The elements of the parable — one by one

The parable is made of six elements, and each is either inside the one before it or feeds it.

مِشْكَاةmishkāt

The sense the lexicographers record: a hollow opened in a wall which does not go through to the other side; the niche in which a lamp is set.

And the qualification "which does not go through to the other side" in the definition is decisive: a mishkāt is not a window. A window lets light through; a niche holds the light and throws it back.

A note about the word's origin: some of the lexicographers record that the word came into Arabic from another language. I transmit this view as a note that is transmitted; I say nothing definite.

Its work in the parable: to gather the light and to prevent its scattering. A lamp may burn in the open air too; but the lamp in a niche does not scatter its light — it gives it in one direction and concentrates it.

مِصْبَاحmiṣbāḥ

Root: ص-ب-ح. Its concrete sense is morning (ṣubḥ). The root was analysed at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/6 (fa-tuṣbiḥū); the note there: "a thing done at night being seen in the morning."

And miṣbāḥ: the thing that brings the morning — a lamp.

The origin of the word is worth noting, and I give it as an observation about the root: in Arabic the lamp has been named "the instrument of morning". A small light, that is, has been seen as a piece of morning within the night.

And the distinction recorded at Nūḥ, 71/16, works here: nūr is the light itself; sirāj and miṣbāḥ are the body that produces the light.

Its work in the parable: the source of the light. The element that stands at the centre of the parable.

زُجَاجَةzujāja

Glass. The sense the lexicographers record: a transparent substance that lets light through.

Its work in the parable runs two ways, and both are worth noting:

WorkHow
To protectIt guards the flame from the wind; it keeps it from going out
To increaseIt lets the light through and spreads it concentrated

Glass, that is, is both a barrier and a thing that lets through. It does not hold the light back, but it does protect the flame.

And this is the finest element in the parable, which I record as my own reading: to protect a thing and to shut it in are not the same. Glass is a boundary that protects without covering.

And this agrees with the sūra as a whole: Sūrat al-Nūr speaks from beginning to end of boundaries — the boundary of the house, of the glance, of speech. And in the thirty-fifth verse an element that is a boundary enters the parable as something that increases the light rather than lessening it.

كَوْكَبٌ دُرِّىٌّ — a star like a pearl

كَوْكَب — a star.

دُرِّىّ — and there is disagreement over the origin of the word:

Reading / originRootSense
دُرِّيّ (durriyy)د-ر-رShining like a pearl (durr)
دِرِّيء / دُرِّيء (dirrīʾ / durrīʾ)د-ر-أDriven, shot forth — a shooting star

The different readings of the word are recorded in the classical sources on the variant readings. Since I cannot state with certainty which reader read which, I write no names.

The two pictures the two readings give are worth noting:

  • The pearl reading: a fixed, pure body shining of itself.
  • The shooting-star reading: a moving, sudden brightness that catches the eye.

The root د-ر-أ occurred in the sūra's eighth verse (yadraʾu — it averts). That the two words may come from the same root is the ground of the second reading.

Its work in the parable: to give the quality of the glass. The glass is no ordinary glass; it appears to be a source of light itself.

شَجَرَةٍ مُّبَٰرَكَةٍ زَيْتُونَةٍ — the blessed olive tree

The source of the fuel is named here, and the plant chosen is worth noting.

زَيْتُون — the olive. The Qurʾān names this tree in several places: wa'l-zaytūni wa ṭūri sīnīn (al-Tīn 95/1) — treated in al-Tīn; wa shajaratan takhruju min ṭūri saynāʾa tanbutu bi'l-duhn (al-Muʾminūn 23/20).

مُبَارَكَة — root ب-ر-ك: its concrete sense is a camel's kneeling down, its settling and staying in a place (burūk). Birka — a pool, the place where water gathers and stays. And baraka: a thing's staying in a place and increasing, its continuance.

The concrete sense of the root explains the work of the attribute here, and I record this as my own reading: baraka is not a sudden abundance — it is a lasting and continuing increase. And the olive tree is the concrete example of that description: it grows slowly, it lives long, and it bears fruit for generations.

Concrete reasons for the choice of the olive can be enumerated, and these are historically verifiable pieces of information:

The propertyIts counterpart in the parable
Olive oil is the commonest lamp fuel of that ageThe parable is built with something the hearer knows
The tree lives very long — for centuriesThe concrete counterpart of continuance
It grows in arid soilBeing able to exist with little
Its oil burns without soot and gives a clean lightThe quality of the light

These properties were known to everyone living in that country. The force of the parable comes from its being familiar.

لَّا شَرْقِيَّةٍ وَلَا غَرْبِيَّةٍ — "neither of the east nor of the west"

This is the most disputed element in the parable, and several explanations are transmitted in the classical commentaries:

ExplanationIts content
1. Standing in open groundThe tree is in a place that gets neither the morning sun alone nor the evening sun alone; it gets the sun all day. It is recorded that the oil of such a tree is purer
2. Belonging to no placeThe tree is not the property of a particular region or of a particular direction
3. A pointer to a definite regionReports to the effect that the expression means a particular region

I impose no preference, and it is not binding.

But the first explanation's agreement with the parable as a whole may be recorded, and I give this as my own reading: all the elements of the parable are things that increase the quality of the light — the niche gathers, the glass guards and concentrates, the olive burns clean. And the qualification "neither of the east nor of the west" conveys, on the same line, the purity of the oil.

And the second explanation is worth noting too, because it looks at another side of the verse: nūr is not the property of a region, of a lineage, of a party. This agrees with the general language of the sūra and of the Qurʾān — as was recorded at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/13: the measure is not lineage but ʿinda'llāh.

يَكَادُ زَيْتُهَا يُضِىٓءُ وَلَوْ لَمْ تَمْسَسْهُ نَارٌ

This is the most striking clause of the parable.

يَكَادُ — "almost". In Arabic the verb kāda conveys that a thing has come very close to happening but has not happened.

And what the clause builds is this: the oil comes close to giving light without fire's touching it — but it does not give it.

Two notes are needed:

One. Fire is nonetheless required. The verb kāda says exactly this: almost, but not. The oil does not give light by itself.

Two. But the degree of readiness is stressed. The oil is so pure that it stands as close to kindling as can be.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the verb itself: kāda conveys not the happening but the nearness. To read the clause as "the oil burns of itself" runs against the sense of the verb.

تَمْسَسْهُ — root م-س-س: to touch. The same verb occurred in the fourteenth verse: la-massakum … ʿadhābun ʿaẓīm. In both places the lightest contact.

And the two occurrences build a contrast:

VerseWhat touchesThe outcome
14ʿadhābun ʿaẓīmA punishment would have touched them
35nār — fireIt would give light even without its touching

The same verb, the one in a negative and the other in a positive context. I record this as an observation about the word order.

And the root of the word nār is the same as the sūra's name: ن-و-ر. Fire and light, from one root. And what the clause does is to separate the two: light is (almost) possible without fire.

نُّورٌ عَلَىٰ نُورٍ — light upon light

This is the seal of the parable, and it consists of two words.

In Arabic the expression conveys a layering: one light above another light. And in the classical commentaries several explanations of what this is are transmitted:

ExplanationIts content
1The layers of the elements in the parable: the lights of the niche, the glass, the fire and the oil, one upon another
2Guidances coming one after another: after one light, another light
3The expression is an intensification conveying the degree of the light

I impose no preference.

And the contrast the expression will build with the fortieth verse will be taken up in that discussion: there it will say ẓulumātun baʿḍuhā fawqa baʿḍ — "darknesses, one above another". The same structure, with the opposite object.

And it may be recorded that the word nūr occurs five times in this verse: nūru'l-samāwāt, nūrihī, nūrun, ʿalā nūrin, li-nūrihī. The sūra's name, five times in the sūra's central verse.

I record this as an observation of count.

The elements of the parable — the whole table

What each element does in the parable:

ElementWordWhatIts work in the parable
1مِشْكَاة (mishkāt)The hollow in the wall, the lamp-nicheIt gathers — it prevents the light's scattering, and directs it
2مِصْبَاح (miṣbāḥ)The lampThe source — the body that produces the light
3زُجَاجَة (zujāja)The glassIt protects and increases — it guards the flame from the wind and lets the light through
4كَوْكَبٌ دُرِّىّA star like a pearlIt qualifies — it conveys that the glass itself shines too
5شَجَرَة مُبَارَكَة زَيْتُونَةThe blessed olive treeIt feeds — the source of the fuel; continuance and blessing
6لَا شَرْقِيَّة وَلَا غَرْبِيَّةNeither of the east nor of the westIt purifies — it fixes the quality of the oil; and a belonging to nowhere
7يَكَادُ زَيْتُهَا يُضِىءOil that would almost give lightReadiness — the state closest to kindling
8نُورٌ عَلَىٰ نُورLight upon lightLayers — the seal of the parable

And what the table shows is this, which I record as my own reading:

Seven of the eight elements in the parable are not the light itself — they are the apparatus around the light. The niche, the glass, the tree, the oil, the direction, the readiness: all of them are elements that make the light possible, that guard it, feed it and increase it.

The parable, that is, tells not how a light comes to be but how a light is kept.

And this agrees with the sūra as a whole. The whole subject of Sūrat al-Nūr is protection and boundary: the guarding of standing (4-5, 11-26), the guarding of the house (27-29, 58-59), the guarding of the glance and of chastity (30-31). And the parable in the central verse tells how a flame is kept.

I record this connection as my own reading; the functions of the elements in the parable are read from the wording of the verse.

A note on the variant readings

Different readings of the verb يُوقَدُ are recorded in the classical sources on the variant readings — in the passive (yūqadu) and in active forms, and also with a feminine pronoun (tūqadu). It is recorded that they convey no great change in meaning. Since I cannot state with certainty which reader read which, I write no names.

There is a grammatical debate about the subject of the verb as well: is it the miṣbāḥ that burns, or the zujāja? This is a question of case arising from the reference of the pronouns in the sentence, and it is debated in the classical sources. I make no preference.

يَهْدِى ٱللَّهُ لِنُورِهِۦ مَن يَشَآءُ

The clause that comes after the parable says whose the parable is.

And the particle is worth noting: yahdī li-nūrihī — "He guides to His light". Not ilā but the lām. The classical lexicographers record a fine difference between the use of these two particles with the verb of guiding; since I cannot give a definite rule, I draw no conclusion.

And the verb of the clause is worth noting: yahdī — to guide, to show the way.

The distinction recorded at al-Baqara, 2/257, works here:

ٱلظُّلُمَٰت is plural, ٱلنُّور singular. And this is a consistent usage in the Qurʾān."darkness is the absence of light, and absence has many shapes; light is one. The way is lost in more than one manner, but the place arrived at is one."

And Sūrat al-Nūr repeats this distinction within itself:

VerseWordNumber
35nūrSingular — five times, always singular
40ẓulumātPlural — and baʿḍuhā fawqa baʿḍ
40nūrSingularfa-mā lahū min nūr

The pattern recorded in al-Baqara is confirmed twice in Sūrat al-Nūr, five verses apart. I record this as an observation about the word order.

وَيَضْرِبُ ٱللَّهُ ٱلْأَمْثَٰلَ لِلنَّاسِ — the parable being given its name

Having built the parable, the verse gives it a name: amthāl — likenesses.

And this is the most important note within the verse itself, and the text here repeats the note of tanzīh entered at the head of this section: what is described is a likeness.

The idiom ḍaraba mathal — "to strike a likeness" — conveys in Arabic the framing of a comparison. The root ض-ر-ب occurred twice in the thirty-first verse of this sūra (yaḍribna bi-khumurihinna, lā yaḍribna bi-arjulihinna). The same verb, in three distinct tasks.

And the qualification li'l-nās is worth noting: the likeness is given not to a particular group but to people. This is one of the few places in the sūra where the word nās occurs.


24/36-38

فِى بُيُوتٍ أَذِنَ ٱللَّهُ أَن تُرْفَعَ وَيُذْكَرَ فِيهَا ٱسْمُهُۥ يُسَبِّحُ لَهُۥ فِيهَا بِٱلْغُدُوِّ وَٱلْءَاصَالِ · رِجَالٌ لَّا تُلْهِيهِمْ تِجَٰرَةٌ وَلَا بَيْعٌ عَن ذِكْرِ ٱللَّهِ وَإِقَامِ ٱلصَّلَوٰةِ وَإِيتَآءِ ٱلزَّكَوٰةِ يَخَافُونَ يَوْمًا تَتَقَلَّبُ فِيهِ ٱلْقُلُوبُ وَٱلْأَبْصَٰرُ · لِيَجْزِيَهُمُ ٱللَّهُ أَحْسَنَ مَا عَمِلُوا۟ وَيَزِيدَهُم مِّن فَضْلِهِۦ وَٱللَّهُ يَرْزُقُ مَن يَشَآءُ بِغَيْرِ حِسَابٍ

Fī buyūtin adhina'llāhu an turfaʿa wa yudhkara fīha'smuh, yusabbiḥu lahū fīhā bi'l-ghuduwwi wa'l-āṣāl · Rijālun lā tulhīhim tijāratun wa lā bayʿun ʿan dhikri'llāhi wa iqāmi'l-ṣalāti wa ītāʾi'l-zakāh, yakhāfūna yawman tataqallabu fīhi'l-qulūbu wa'l-abṣār · Li-yajziyahumu'llāhu aḥsana mā ʿamilū wa yazīdahum min faḍlih, wa'llāhu yarzuqu man yashāʾu bi-ghayri ḥisāb

"(That lamp is) in houses God has given leave to be raised, and that His name be mentioned in them. In them He is glorified morning and evening by men whom neither trade nor commerce turns away from the remembrance of God, from the keeping up of the prayer and the giving of the alms. They fear a day on which hearts and eyes will be turned about — that God may reward them for the best of what they did, and increase them of His bounty. God provides for whom He wills without reckoning."

فِى بُيُوتٍ — the houses, and the ring within the sūra

The verse says where the lamp of the parable is: fī buyūt — "in houses".

And the word had occurred seven verses earlier in an altogether different task.

VerseBaytWhat is done
27buyūtan ghayra buyūtikumNot entered without leave
29buyūtan ghayra maskūnaThe exception
36fī buyūtin adhina'llāhHouses God has given leave for
61buyūtikum … buyūti ābāʾikum …The manners of eating

And the wording in the thirty-sixth verse is worth noting: adhina'llāhu — "God gave leave".

The word for leave (أ-ذ-ن), that is, occurs in two distinct places in the sūra, and in both it has to do with a house:

VerseWho gives the leaveWhat is allowed
28The householderEntering
36GodThe raising of the house

I record this ring as my own reading; the two occurrences of the root and their subjects stand in the text.

أَن تُرْفَعَ — being raised

رَفَعَ — root ر-ف-ع: to raise. The root was analysed at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/2 (lā tarfaʿū aṣwātakum).

And there is a contrast between the two usages that is worth noting:

VerseWhat is raisedThe ruling
al-Ḥujurāt 49/2aṣwātakum — voicesForbidden
al-Nūr 24/36buyūt — housesPermitted

The same verb, the one forbidden and the other permitted. I record this as an observation about the word order.

And two explanations of what the verb turfaʿa means are transmitted in the classical commentaries:

ExplanationIts content
1. PhysicalThe building of them, their construction
2. SpiritualTheir being honoured, kept clean, held in esteem

The two explanations do not exclude one another, and I impose no preference.

رِجَالٌ لَّا تُلْهِيهِمْ تِجَٰرَةٌ وَلَا بَيْعٌ

أَلْهَىٰ — root ل-ه-و: to be diverted, to have one's attention drawn elsewhere. Lahw — what diverts. The root was analysed at al-Takāthur, 102/1 (alhākumu'l-takāthur).

And the choice of the verb is worth noting: the verse does not say "they do not trade". It says "trade does not turn them away".

What is censured, that is, is not trade but trade's holding the attention. This distinction is read from the text and agrees with the measure recorded at al-Jumuʿa, 62/11.

The difference between تِجَارَة and بَيْع is recorded in the classical commentaries thus: tijāra is a continuing occupation, bayʿ a single transaction of buying and selling. The verse, that is, names both the continuing and the momentary.

I transmit this distinction as an explanation that is transmitted.

يَوْمًا تَتَقَلَّبُ فِيهِ ٱلْقُلُوبُ وَٱلْأَبْصَٰرُ

تَقَلَّبَ — root ق-ل-ب: to turn, to turn upside down. And from the same root comes qalb (the heart) — the connection the lexicographers draw: the heart is what turns continually from state to state.

In the verse two derivatives of the root stand side by side: tataqallabu and al-qulūb. A jinās (the standing together of words from one root) is formed.

And the word al-abṣār forms a ring with the glance of the thirtieth and thirty-first verses:

VerseBaṣarWhat happens
30-31yaghuḍḍū min abṣārihimMan lowers his glance
37tataqallabu fīhi … al-abṣārThe eyes are turned about — not in man's hands

The sūra first records man's will over the eye, then names the place where that will ends.

I record this as my own reading; the places of the words stand in the text.

لِيَجْزِيَهُمُ ٱللَّهُ أَحْسَنَ مَا عَمِلُوا۟

The expression is worth noting: aḥsana mā ʿamilū — "the best of what they did".

The recompense, that is, is given not according to the average of what was done but according to the best of it. And on top of that an increase is added: wa yazīdahum min faḍlih.

بِغَيْرِ حِسَابٍ — "without reckoning". The word can be understood in two ways, and both are transmitted in the classical commentaries: without measure, without limit, or without being brought to account. I impose no preference.


24/39

وَٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوٓا۟ أَعْمَٰلُهُمْ كَسَرَابٍۭ بِقِيعَةٍ يَحْسَبُهُ ٱلظَّمْـَٔانُ مَآءً حَتَّىٰٓ إِذَا جَآءَهُۥ لَمْ يَجِدْهُ شَيْـًٔا وَوَجَدَ ٱللَّهَ عِندَهُۥ فَوَفَّىٰهُ حِسَابَهُۥ وَٱللَّهُ سَرِيعُ ٱلْحِسَابِ

Wa'lladhīna kafarū aʿmāluhum ka-sarābin bi-qīʿatin yaḥsabuhu'l-ẓamʾānu māʾan ḥattā idhā jāʾahū lam yajidhu shayʾan wa wajada'llāha ʿindahū fa-waffāhu ḥisābah, wa'llāhu sarīʿu'l-ḥisāb

"And the deeds of those who disbelieve are like a mirage on a level plain: the thirsty man takes it for water; when he comes to it he finds it nothing at all. But he finds God there, and God pays him his account in full. God is swift in reckoning."

The counter-parable begins

In the thirty-fifth verse a parable of light was built. The thirty-ninth and fortieth verses build its counter-parables.

And the arrangement is worth noting: there are two counter-parables, not one.

VerseParableIts subject
35The lampLight
39The mirageWhat appears but is not
40Darkness upon darknessWhat is not seen

Two distinct things, that is, are set against the light, and the two differ from each other. This is the most important observation about the arrangement in this section, and it will be taken up with a table at the fortieth verse.

سَرَاب — the mirage

Root: س-ر-ب. This root was analysed at al-Nabaʾ, 78/20 (fa-kānat sarābā); I rely on that treatment. The note there:

سَرَاب — Root: س-ر-ب. The concrete sense of the root is to flow, to go, to set out upon a road.سَرَاب — a mirage: the appearance that looks like water from afar in the heat and vanishes when one draws near.

And the idea of "flowing" in the root of the word explains the look of the mirage: a mirage looks from a distance like running water.

The physical cause of a mirage is a known phenomenon: the layer of air above a heated ground surface bends the light and reflects the sky upon the ground. This is a note of information; no scientific claim is loaded onto the verse.

بِقِيعَةٍ — level ground

قِيعَة / قَاع — root ق-و-ع. The sense the lexicographers record: level, wide ground with no plants upon it. Qāʿ — a flat.

And the word occurs once more in the Qurʾān: fa-yadharuhā qāʿan ṣafṣafā (Ṭāhā 20/106) — "He will leave it a level plain".

The work of the word here is worth noting: a mirage is seen only on level and empty ground. It does not form on broken ground or where there are plants.

The verse, that is, does not merely say "a mirage" — it names the ground on which the mirage forms.

I record this as my own reading and add this: this element of the parable builds a contrast with the parable of the thirty-fifth verse. There the ground was an olive tree — rooted, long-lived, fruitful. Here the ground is a qīʿa — an empty flat.

24/3524/39
The groundshajaratun mubāraka — a blessed treeqīʿa — an empty flat
The sourcezayt — oil, real fuelNone — an appearance
The outcomenūrun ʿalā nūrlam yajidhu shayʾā

ٱلظَّمْـَٔان — the thirsty man

Root: ظ-م-أ. Its concrete sense is thirst. Ẓamaʾ — thirst; ẓamʾān — one who is thirsty.

The word occurs in several places in the Qurʾān: lā taẓmaʾu fīhā wa lā taḍḥā (Ṭāhā 20/119) — "there you will neither thirst nor be exposed to the sun".

And the work of the word here is the most affecting side of the parable, which I record as my own reading:

The man who sees the mirage is a thirsty man. And thirst makes the deception both possible and intelligible. A man is inclined to see the thing he is looking for.

The parable, that is, names not the folly of the deceived but his need. This gives the parable not harshness but realism.

And the verb is worth noting: yaḥsabuhū — "he takes it for". The same verb occurred in the sūra at the eleventh verse (lā taḥsabūhu sharran) and at the fifteenth (taḥsabūnahū hayyinan).

VerseḤasiba — to take a thing forWhat
11lā taḥsabūhu sharran lakumTo take the slander for an evil
15taḥsabūnahū hayyināTo take it for a small thing
39yaḥsabuhu'l-ẓamʾānu māʾanTo take a mirage for water
57lā taḥsabanna'lladhīna kafarū muʿjizīnTo take them for able to thwart

The root four times in the sūra, and in every one of them it conveys a wrong appraisal.

I record this as an observation about the word order; the places of the words can be counted in the text. And the diagnosis of the fifteenth verse — the taking of a thing for hayyin — is here pictured in a parable.

وَوَجَدَ ٱللَّهَ عِندَهُۥ — an unlooked-for clause

The arrangement of the clause is worth noting: lam yajidhu shayʾan wa wajada'llāha ʿindah.

The same verb twice: lam yajid (he did not find) and wajada (he found).

What was soughtWhat was found
The firstWaterNothing at all
The secondGod

What was sought was not there; but something not sought was.

This is the most unlooked-for move in the parable, and I record it as my own reading: the mirage was empty, but the place where the mirage was was not empty. The outcome of the deception is not a nothingness but an encounter.

فَوَفَّىٰهُ حِسَابَهُۥ

وَفَّىٰ — root و-ف-ي: analysed at the twenty-fifth verse. To pay in full.

And the word occurred in the twenty-fifth verse too: yuwaffīhimu'llāhu dīnahumu'l-ḥaqq. In both places the same verb, in the same task.


24/40

أَوْ كَظُلُمَٰتٍ فِى بَحْرٍ لُّجِّىٍّ يَغْشَىٰهُ مَوْجٌ مِّن فَوْقِهِۦ مَوْجٌ مِّن فَوْقِهِۦ سَحَابٌ ظُلُمَٰتٌۢ بَعْضُهَا فَوْقَ بَعْضٍ إِذَآ أَخْرَجَ يَدَهُۥ لَمْ يَكَدْ يَرَىٰهَا وَمَن لَّمْ يَجْعَلِ ٱللَّهُ لَهُۥ نُورًا فَمَا لَهُۥ مِن نُّورٍ

Aw ka-ẓulumātin fī baḥrin lujjiyyin yaghshāhu mawjun min fawqihī mawjun min fawqihī saḥāb, ẓulumātun baʿḍuhā fawqa baʿḍ, idhā akhraja yadahū lam yakad yarāhā, wa man lam yajʿali'llāhu lahū nūran fa-mā lahū min nūr

"Or like darknesses in a deep sea, covered by a wave, above it another wave, above that a cloud: darknesses one above another. If he puts out his hand he can hardly see it. And whomever God has given no light — for him there is no light at all."

The second counter-parable

The thirty-ninth verse described a mirage; the fortieth describes ẓulumāt. And the two parables take up different things.

Recording this difference is the most important work of this section, and I give it as my own reading:

24/39 — The mirage24/40 — The darkness
What is thereAn appearance, but no thingNeither appearance nor thing
DeceptionPresent — it is taken for waterAbsent — nothing is seen at all
The man's conditionHopeful — he is running towards itHelpless — he cannot see even his hand
The placeThe desert — dry, level, litThe bottom of the sea — watery, deep, dark
The directionHorizontal — towards a distanceVertical — layers one upon another
When it is understoodOn arrival (ḥattā idhā jāʾahū)Never — there is nothing to understand

The two parables tell of two distinct conditions: the one of believing a wrong thing, the other of being unable to see anything at all.

And both stand against the thirty-fifth verse — but from different directions:

24/35 — The light24/39 — The mirage24/40 — The darkness
Is there lightYesYes, but deceiving (sunlight produces the mirage)No
Layersnūrun ʿalā nūrincreasingA single layerẓulumātun baʿḍuhā fawqa baʿḍdiminishing
The work of the layersThey guard and multiply the lightThey cut off the light
The outcomeSeeingArriving at nothingNot even seeing one's hand

The structure of layers in the two parables is the most striking place in the third line:

In the thirty-fifth verse the layers were set one upon another, and each layer increased the light: the niche, the glass, the oil, the fire — all coming together to make nūrun ʿalā nūr.

In the fortieth verse the layers are also set one upon another, and each layer increases the darkness: the sea, the wave, the second wave, the cloud — all coming together to make ẓulumātun baʿḍuhā fawqa baʿḍ.

The same structure, two opposite outcomes. And the two expressions are each other's reflection in a mirror:

VerseExpression
35نُّورٌ عَلَىٰ نُورٍlight upon light
40ظُلُمَٰتٌۢ بَعْضُهَا فَوْقَ بَعْضٍdarknesses, one above another

I record this contrast as my own reading; the structure and the places of the two expressions are the wording of the text and can be compared.

لُّجِّىّ — the deep sea

Root: ل-ج-ج. The sense the lexicographers record: to persist in a thing, to press upon it; and water's being much and deep.

Lujj — the vast and deep part of the sea. Lajja — he persisted. Lijāj — obstinacy.

And the connection between the two senses of the root is drawn by the lexicographers through a shared idea: a thing's piling up one upon another, its increase. Persistence is the piling of an act upon itself; a lujja is the piling of water upon itself.

The Qurʾān uses the same root in another place: not in the passage ṣarḥun mumarradun min qawārīr, but the word lujja occurs at al-Naml 27/44.

Its work in the parable: depth. The distance from the surface.

يَغْشَىٰهُ مَوْجٌ — the covering wave

غَشِيَ — root غ-ش-ي: to cover, to overspread, to envelop. Ghishāwa — the film over the eye. The root was taken up at al-Najm, 53/16 (idh yaghsha'l-sidrata mā yaghshā).

مَوْج — root م-و-ج: to surge, to move in waves.

And the counting of the layers is worth noting. The verse enumerates four layers:

LayerExpression
1baḥrin lujjiyy — the deep sea itself
2yaghshāhu mawj — a wave
3min fawqihī mawj — above it another wave
4min fawqihī saḥāb — above that a cloud

And all four do the same thing: they come in between the source of the light and the man.

And the fourth layer is worth noting: saḥāb — a cloud. The root س-ح-ب: to drag, to draw. The root was analysed at al-Ṭūr, 52/44: "a cloud is what is dragged across the sky."

And the cloud will return in the sūra's forty-third verse — but there in an altogether different task: as the source of the rain.

VerseSaḥābIts function
40min fawqihī saḥābThe last layer of the darkness
43yuzjī saḥābanThe source of the rain

The same word, three verses apart, in two opposite tasks. I record this as an observation about the word order.

إِذَآ أَخْرَجَ يَدَهُۥ لَمْ يَكَدْ يَرَىٰهَا

The last clause of the parable gives the degree of the darkness by a measure: the man cannot see his own hand.

And the choice of the measure is worth noting, and I record this as my own reading: the verse names not something far off but the nearest thing. The measure of darkness is the invisibility not of the far but of the near.

And the verb is the same as the verb of the thirty-fifth verse: yakādu / lam yakad.

VerseKādaWhat
35yakādu zaytuhā yuḍīʾuIt would almost give light — positive
40lam yakad yarāhāHe can hardly see it — negative

The same verb, the one positive and the other negative, and both conveying an approach to a threshold.

I record this contrast as my own reading; the two occurrences of the verb stand in the text.

وَمَن لَّمْ يَجْعَلِ ٱللَّهُ لَهُۥ نُورًا فَمَا لَهُۥ مِن نُّورٍ

The seal of the section, and the last occurrence of the root nūr.

The structure of the sentence is a condition and its answer, and the arrangement is worth noting: nūr occurs twice — the one indefinite (nūran), the other an indefinite reinforced with min (min nūrin).

In Arabic the pattern mā … min makes a negation absolute: "there is no light at all". Min is here the particle that generalises the negation (min zāʾida li'l-tanzīs).

And the contrast with the thirty-fifth verse is completed:

VerseClause
35yahdi'llāhu li-nūrihī man yashāʾ — He guides whom He wills to His light
40wa man lam yajʿali'llāhu lahū nūran fa-mā lahū min nūr — whomever God has given no light has no light

The two clauses carry the same structure and are tied to the same source.

And the pattern of plural and singular recorded at al-Baqara, 2/257, is confirmed again here: in the verse ẓulumāt is plural (twice), nūr singular (twice).


24/41-42

أَلَمْ تَرَ أَنَّ ٱللَّهَ يُسَبِّحُ لَهُۥ مَن فِى ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتِ وَٱلْأَرْضِ وَٱلطَّيْرُ صَٰٓفَّٰتٍ كُلٌّ قَدْ عَلِمَ صَلَاتَهُۥ وَتَسْبِيحَهُۥ وَٱللَّهُ عَلِيمٌۢ بِمَا يَفْعَلُونَ · وَلِلَّهِ مُلْكُ ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتِ وَٱلْأَرْضِ وَإِلَى ٱللَّهِ ٱلْمَصِيرُ

A-lam tara anna'llāha yusabbiḥu lahū man fi'l-samāwāti wa'l-arḍi wa'l-ṭayru ṣāffāt, kullun qad ʿalima ṣalātahū wa tasbīḥah, wa'llāhu ʿalīmun bimā yafʿalūn · Wa li'llāhi mulku'l-samāwāti wa'l-arḍ, wa ila'llāhi'l-maṣīr

"Have you not seen that God is glorified by whoever is in the heavens and the earth, and by the birds with wings outspread? Each knows its own prayer and its own glorification. God knows what they do. To God belongs the dominion of the heavens and the earth; and to God is the journey's end."

أَلَمْ تَرَ — a new section of the sūra

With the forty-first verse the sūra enters a new series, and the series is marked by a formula: a-lam tara — "have you not seen?"

And the formula occurs three times in the sūra: at 41, at 43, and at 44 (indirectly, as inna fī dhālika).

The function of the formula is worth noting: what looks like a question is in Arabic a way of drawing attention. No information is being asked of the addressee; he is being asked to look at something he already knows.

And that the verb is raʾā (to see) agrees entirely with the section that follows the thirty-fifth verse. The sūra was built upon the glance:

VerseThe verb of seeing
30-31yaghuḍḍū min abṣārihim — lower the glance
35The parable of light
40lam yakad yarāhā — he cannot see
41, 43a-lam tara — have you not seen?
44li-uli'l-abṣār — for those who have eyes

The sūra first narrows the glance, then shows what is to be looked at, then asks "have you not seen?"

I record this as my own reading; the places of the verbs stand in the text and can be counted.

وَٱلطَّيْرُ صَٰٓفَّٰتٍ — the birds in their ranks

صَٰٓفَّٰت — root ص-ف-ف. This root was analysed at al-Ṣāffāt, 37/1, and in al-Ṣaff; I rely on those treatments.

The note in al-Ṣāffāt:

The root was analysed in al-Ṣaff. The definition there: to set several things side by side upon a straight line, in one row. … here the word comes as a feminine plural active participleṣāffāt. That is, not "those that are ranged" but "those that range, those that form ranks". The verb is active.

And at al-Nūr 24/41 the same word occurs in the same form: ṣāffāt.

But there is a difference, and it is worth noting: in Sūrat al-Ṣāffāt the subject of the word is not stated — it comes as an element of an oath, and who it is that forms the ranks is not specified (in the hundred and sixty-fifth verse of that sūra the angels speak).

In al-Nūr the subject is named outright: al-ṭayr — the birds.

SūraExpressionSubject
al-Ṣāffāt 37/1wa'l-ṣāffāti ṣaffāNot stated
al-Nūr 24/41wa'l-ṭayru ṣāffātThe birds

I record this as an observation about the word order.

And the word's use of the birds can be understood in two ways, and both are transmitted in the classical commentaries:

ExplanationIts content
1The state in which birds spread and hold out their wings in flight — the wing forming a straight line
2The birds' flying in rows across the sky

Both agree with the sense of the root and do not exclude one another. I impose no preference.

And it may be recorded that the word is used of birds in one other place in the Qurʾān: a-wa-lam yaraw ila'l-ṭayri fawqahum ṣāffātin wa yaqbiḍn (al-Mulk 67/19) — treated in al-Mulk. There too the same word, in the same form, and of birds.

كُلٌّ قَدْ عَلِمَ صَلَاتَهُۥ وَتَسْبِيحَهُۥ — the clause that is disputed

There is disagreement in the classical commentaries over the subject of the clause, and it needs transmitting.

ReadingThe subject of the verb ʿalimaIts sense
1kullun — every creatureEvery creature knows its own prayer and glorification
2GodGod knows the prayer and glorification of each

Both readings are transmitted in the classical sources; I impose no preference, and neither is binding.

But the place of the second clause in the arrangement may be recorded: immediately after, the verse says wa'llāhu ʿalīmun bimā yafʿalūn. God's knowing, that is, is stated separately and openly. This may provide a ground for the first reading — but I give it not as a preference but as an observation about the word order.

And what the first reading carries is worth noting: that every creature has a form of glorification of its own. Glorification, that is, is not of one type.

يُسَبِّحُ — glorification

Root: س-ب-ح. Its concrete sense is to swim in water or in air, to go flowing. Sabḥ — swimming. The root has been taken up at many places in this commentary.

And tasbīḥ: to keep a thing clear of what does not befit it. The connection the lexicographers draw: what swims flows on, passing obstacles; and glorification likewise removes from the divine essence the ascriptions that do not befit it.

The word occurs twice in the sūra: at 36 and at 41. And at 36 it is those who glorify within houses, at 41 the heavens, the earth and the birds. There is a widening between the two verses: from a house to the whole of existence.

I record this as an observation about the word order.

And the subḥānaka of the sixteenth verse is from the same root. The root occurs three times in the sūra: at 16, 36 and 41.

وَإِلَى ٱللَّهِ ٱلْمَصِيرُ

مَصِير — root ص-ي-ر: to become, to be transformed, to arrive at a state. Maṣīr — the place one arrives at, the place of return.

And the sense of "becoming" in the root of the word is worth noting: maṣīr is not merely a place — it is an arriving at a state.


24/43

أَلَمْ تَرَ أَنَّ ٱللَّهَ يُزْجِى سَحَابًا ثُمَّ يُؤَلِّفُ بَيْنَهُۥ ثُمَّ يَجْعَلُهُۥ رُكَامًا فَتَرَى ٱلْوَدْقَ يَخْرُجُ مِنْ خِلَٰلِهِۦ وَيُنَزِّلُ مِنَ ٱلسَّمَآءِ مِن جِبَالٍ فِيهَا مِنۢ بَرَدٍ فَيُصِيبُ بِهِۦ مَن يَشَآءُ وَيَصْرِفُهُۥ عَن مَّن يَشَآءُ يَكَادُ سَنَا بَرْقِهِۦ يَذْهَبُ بِٱلْأَبْصَٰرِ

A-lam tara anna'llāha yuzjī saḥāban thumma yuʾallifu baynahū thumma yajʿaluhū rukāman fa-tara'l-wadqa yakhruju min khilālih, wa yunazzilu mina'l-samāʾi min jibālin fīhā min baradin fa-yuṣību bihī man yashāʾu wa yaṣrifuhū ʿan man yashāʾ, yakādu sanā barqihī yadhhabu bi'l-abṣār

"Have you not seen that God drives the clouds, then joins them together, then piles them up? Then you see the rain issuing from their midst. And He sends down from the sky, from mountains within it, hail; and He strikes with it whom He wills and turns it away from whom He wills. The flash of His lightning all but takes away the sight."

يُزْجِى — to drive

Root: ز-ج-و / ز-ج-ي. The sense the lexicographers record: to move a thing slowly, by pushing, by dragging it along. Izjāʾ — to drive gently and set moving.

And the fine point the word carries is this: the verb conveys not a forcible pushing but a gentle driving forward.

The Qurʾān uses the same root in two other places, and both bear out the sense:

VerseExpressionSense
al-Isrāʾ 17/66yuzjī lakumu'l-fulka fi'l-baḥrHe makes the ship move upon the sea
Yūsuf 12/88biḍāʿatin muzjātA poor stock, one barely driven along

The usage in Yūsuf gives the word's second sense: what is pushed along with difficulty, what is little and of small worth.

And the work of the usage in the verse is worth noting: the clouds are driven — they do not go of themselves, but neither are they flung.

I record this as an observation about the word.

Three stages: يُزْجِىيُؤَلِّفُيَجْعَلُهُ رُكَامًا

The verse sets the forming of the cloud in order with three verbs, and the verbs are joined by thumma.

StageVerbRootWhat is done
1yuzjīز-ج-وTo drive — to set scattered clouds moving
2yuʾallifu baynahūأ-ل-فTo join — to knit them together
3yajʿaluhū rukāmanر-ك-مTo pile — to set them one upon another

And the twofold use of the particle thumma conveys that there is time between the stages. The process is not instantaneous but by degrees.

أَلَّفَ — root أ-ل-ف: to knit together, to bring together and reconcile. Ulfa — cohesion, becoming used to. Alif — the name of the letter; and alf — a thousand. The lexicographers record at the centre of the root the idea of coming together and growing used to one another.

And that the word is used of human relations too is worth noting: the Qurʾān says allafa bayna qulūbihim (Āl ʿImrān 3/103; al-Anfāl 8/63). The same verb, for the joining both of clouds and of hearts.

I record this as an observation about the word.

رُكَام — root ر-ك-م. This root was analysed at al-Ṭūr, 52/44; I rely on that treatment. The note there: ر-ك-م: to pile one upon another. Rukām — a heap.

And the usage in al-Ṭūr is worth noting: there saḥābun markūm — "a cloud piled up" — occurred, and it was in the form of a passive participle. Here, however, rukām — in the verbal-noun form, and the second object of the verb yajʿaluhū.

SūraExpressionForm
al-Ṭūr 52/44saḥābun markūmA passive participle — piled up
al-Nūr 24/43yajʿaluhū rukāmāA verbal noun — He makes it a heap

The same root in both places, of a cloud. I record this as an observation about the word order.

ٱلْوَدْق — the drops of rain

Root: و-د-ق. This word was taken up in the table of words for rain in al-Shūrā; I rely on that treatment. The note there:

وَدْق (wadq) | و-د-ق | The grains, the drops of the rain

And the table in the al-Shūrā section separated the words Arabic uses for rain:

WordRootWhat
مَطَرم-ط-رThe event of raining itself
غَيْثغ-ي-ثComing to the rescue
وَدْقو-د-قGrains, drops
صَيِّبص-و-بA downpour that finds its mark

And the choice of wadq agrees with the verse's way of looking: the verse tells of the rain not as an event but as a process — the driving, the joining, the piling, and then the coming out of the drops.

I record this as an observation about the word order.

مِنْ خِلَٰلِهِ — "from their midst". Khilāl — root خ-ل-ل: the gap between two things, an interval. Khalal — a gap, a breach. And khalīl (a friend) is from this root too — the connection the lexicographers draw: friendship is that nothing else comes in between two people.

مِن جِبَالٍ فِيهَا مِنۢ بَرَدٍ — the expression that is disputed

This expression is the most disputed place in the verse in point of language, and several explanations are transmitted in the classical commentaries:

ExplanationIts content
1Jibāl is a figure: the masses of cloud in the sky have been called "mountains" because of their size
2The expression conveys the places in the sky from which the hail comes down; its how is not entered into
3The min in the expression min baradin conveys the kind: heaps consisting of hail

I impose no preference, and it is not binding.

And a note of method needs entering: no claim of "foretelling" modern meteorology is drawn from this verse. The rule of the method (Method) is plain: no hunting for scientific miracles.

What can be said is this, and it is not a small thing: the verse describes the forming of the rain as a process by stages, and by the particle thumma it conveys that there is time between the stages. This stands within the text itself and needs no translating into a modern model.

The same measure was recorded in the discussion of Nūḥ, 71/16, and what was said there holds here too: to make a text need defending afresh with every new scientific model does not increase its force.

يَكَادُ سَنَا بَرْقِهِۦ يَذْهَبُ بِٱلْأَبْصَٰرِ

سَنَا — root س-ن-و/س-ن-ي: a gleam, light. Sanā — the brightness of a thing.

بَرْق — root ب-ر-ق: lightning, a flash.

And the verb occurs for the third time in the sūra: yakādu.

VerseKādaWhat
35yakādu zaytuhā yuḍīʾuIt would almost give light
40lam yakad yarāhāHe can almost not see it
43yakādu sanā barqihī yadhhabu bi'l-abṣārIt all but takes away the sight

In all three occurrences there is a matter of light, and all three approach a threshold:

  • 35: the light comes close to being without fire.
  • 40: the eye comes close to seeing nothing at all.
  • 43: the light comes close to destroying sight.

And the third is worth recording, and I record it as my own reading: the sūra does not name light only as a good thing. An excess of it also prevents seeing.

In the sūra's weave of light, that is, there are three positions: the absence of light (40), the measure of light (35), and the excess of light (43). And the sūra's name is the middle one.

I record this reading as my own reading; the wording of the three verses stands in the text.


24/44-45

يُقَلِّبُ ٱللَّهُ ٱلَّيْلَ وَٱلنَّهَارَ إِنَّ فِى ذَٰلِكَ لَعِبْرَةً لِّأُو۟لِى ٱلْأَبْصَٰرِ · وَٱللَّهُ خَلَقَ كُلَّ دَآبَّةٍ مِّن مَّآءٍ فَمِنْهُم مَّن يَمْشِى عَلَىٰ بَطْنِهِۦ وَمِنْهُم مَّن يَمْشِى عَلَىٰ رِجْلَيْنِ وَمِنْهُم مَّن يَمْشِى عَلَىٰٓ أَرْبَعٍ يَخْلُقُ ٱللَّهُ مَا يَشَآءُ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ عَلَىٰ كُلِّ شَىْءٍ قَدِيرٌ

Yuqallibu'llāhu'l-layla wa'l-nahār, inna fī dhālika la-ʿibratan li-uli'l-abṣār · Wa'llāhu khalaqa kulla dābbatin min māʾ, fa-minhum man yamshī ʿalā baṭnihī wa minhum man yamshī ʿalā rijlayni wa minhum man yamshī ʿalā arbaʿ, yakhluqu'llāhu mā yashāʾ, inna'llāha ʿalā kulli shayʾin qadīr

"God turns the night and the day about. In that there is a lesson for those who have eyes. God created every moving creature from water: some of them go upon their bellies, some upon two feet, and some upon four. God creates what He wills. God has power over everything."

يُقَلِّبُ — to turn about

The root ق-ل-ب was analysed at the thirty-seventh verse. And there tataqallabu'l-qulūbu wa'l-abṣār — the turning about of hearts and eyes — was named.

And here the same root comes in Form II, and as God's act: yuqallibu.

VerseFormSubjectObject
37tataqallabu (Form V — reflexive)Hearts and eyes
44yuqallibu (Form II — transitive)GodNight and day

The same root, the one a turning of itself, the other a turning of something else. I record this as an observation about the word order.

لِّأُو۟لِى ٱلْأَبْصَٰرِ — "those who have eyes"

And the sūra's weave of the eye closes here.

VerseBaṣar
30-31yaghuḍḍū min abṣārihim — lower the glance
37tataqallabu … al-abṣār — the eyes are turned about
40lam yakad yarāhā — he cannot see
43yadhhabu bi'l-abṣār — it takes away the sight
44li-uli'l-abṣārfor those who have eyes

Five occurrences, the word five times, from one end of the sūra to the other.

And the last occurrence uses the word as a capacity: ulu'l-abṣār — "those who have eyes, those who can see".

This is of the same kind as the pattern recorded at al-Baqara, 2/179: there stood ulu'l-albāb (those who have pith), and this note was entered: "All three measure not a capacity but a function."

Here it is the same: ulu'l-abṣār is not everyone who has an eye — it is the man who can look.

And this forms a ring with the command at the head of the sūra: in the thirtieth verse the glance was lowered; in the forty-fourth those who can see are named.

The sūra, that is, begins with a command that narrows the eye and arrives at a sentence that praises the man who sees.

I record this reading as my own reading; the places of the words can be counted in the text.

عِبْرَة — root ع-ب-ر: its concrete sense is to pass from one place to another, to cross over. ʿUbūr — a crossing; maʿbar — a ford; taʿbīr — to interpret a dream (to pass from the image to the meaning); ʿibāra — the wording of a saying (the bridge over which the meaning is crossed).

And ʿibra: to pass from what is seen to what is not seen.

The concrete sense of the root gives exactly the work of the word, and I record this as an observation about the root: to take a lesson is not to stay within an event — it is to pass from that event to somewhere else.

كُلَّ دَآبَّةٍ مِّن مَّآءٍ

دَابَّة — root د-ب-ب: to move upon the ground, to walk. Dabba — it walked. And dābba: every living thing that moves upon the earth.

The scope of the word is wide: not only four-footed animals but every living thing that moves. The threefold enumeration in the rest of the verse bears this out.

مِّن مَّآءٍ — "from water". And a note is needed about the function of the particle min.

The particle can be understood in two ways, and both are transmitted in the classical commentaries:

ExplanationIts content
1. It conveys a materialThe material from which living things were created is water
2. It conveys a part (partitive)From part of the water; or the water of generation

I impose no preference.

And a note of method: no claim of "foretelling" modern biology is drawn from this verse. The Qurʾān's naming of water as the source of life occurs in other places too (al-Anbiyāʾ 21/30), and this is an expression that stands within the text itself.

Three ways of going

The verse divides living creatures in three according to their manner of movement:

OrderExpressionWhat
1ʿalā baṭnihīUpon its belly — the creeping things
2ʿalā rijlaynTwo feet
3ʿalā arbaʿFour feet

And the measure of the classification is worth noting: the number of feet — that is, the manner of movement.

The verse divides living creatures not by size, by usefulness, by where they live, or by kind — but by their walking. And this agrees with the verse's own word: dābba, by its root, is "the one that walks".

The verse, that is, classifies what it names by the measure of that name itself.

I record this as my own reading; the root of the word and the measure of the classification stand in the text.

And the clause yakhluqu'llāhu mā yashāʾ conveys that the enumeration is not closed. The list is not limited to three; the verse leaves the list open itself.


24/46

لَّقَدْ أَنزَلْنَآ ءَايَٰتٍ مُّبَيِّنَٰتٍ وَٱللَّهُ يَهْدِى مَن يَشَآءُ إِلَىٰ صِرَٰطٍ مُّسْتَقِيمٍ

Laqad anzalnā āyātin mubayyināt, wa'llāhu yahdī man yashāʾu ilā ṣirāṭin mustaqīm

"We have surely sent down clear verses. And God guides whom He wills to a straight path."

The repetition of the thirty-fourth verse

This verse is almost identical with the thirty-fourth, and the two verses frame a section.

VerseExpression
34wa laqad anzalnā ilaykum āyātin mubayyināt…
46laqad anzalnā āyātin mubayyināt…

The section between the two verses (35-45) is the sūra's section of light and of the universe. The sūra, that is, opens that section with a sentence and closes it with the same sentence.

I record this as an observation about the word order; the wording of the two verses stands in the text and can be compared.

And the difference is worth noting: the thirty-fourth verse has ilaykum (to you), the forty-sixth does not. And in the thirty-fourth three things were enumerated (āyāt, mathal, mawʿiẓa); here only one.

وَٱللَّهُ يَهْدِى مَن يَشَآءُ إِلَىٰ صِرَٰطٍ مُّسْتَقِيمٍ

The clause can be compared with the last clause of the thirty-fifth verse:

VerseExpressionParticle
35yahdi'llāhu li-nūrihī man yashāʾlām
46wa'llāhu yahdī man yashāʾu ilā ṣirāṭin mustaqīmilā

The same verb, two different particles and two different objects: the one light, the other a road.

And reading the two objects together says something, which I record as my own reading: light is not the road itself — it is what makes the road visible. The sūra names the two separately.

صِرَاط — root ص-ر-ط. The word was analysed in detail in the al-Fātiḥa section; I do not repeat it here.

And that the word occurs only once in the sūra is worth noting: although the sūra is a text of rulings and of manners, it uses the word "road" once — and that at the close.


24/47-50

وَيَقُولُونَ ءَامَنَّا بِٱللَّهِ وَبِٱلرَّسُولِ وَأَطَعْنَا ثُمَّ يَتَوَلَّىٰ فَرِيقٌ مِّنْهُم مِّنۢ بَعْدِ ذَٰلِكَ … أَفِى قُلُوبِهِم مَّرَضٌ أَمِ ٱرْتَابُوٓا۟ أَمْ يَخَافُونَ أَن يَحِيفَ ٱللَّهُ عَلَيْهِمْ وَرَسُولُهُۥ بَلْ أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ هُمُ ٱلظَّٰلِمُونَ

Wa yaqūlūna āmannā bi'llāhi wa bi'l-rasūli wa aṭaʿnā thumma yatawallā farīqun minhum min baʿdi dhālik, wa mā ulāʾika bi'l-muʾminīn · Wa idhā duʿū ila'llāhi wa rasūlihī li-yaḥkuma baynahum idhā farīqun minhum muʿriḍūn · Wa in yakun lahumu'l-ḥaqqu yaʾtū ilayhi mudhʿinīn · A fī qulūbihim maraḍun ami'rtābū am yakhāfūna an yaḥīfa'llāhu ʿalayhim wa rasūluh, bal ulāʾika humu'l-ẓālimūn

"They say, 'We believe in God and in the Messenger, and we obey'; then a party of them turns away after that. Those are not believers. When they are called to God and His Messenger, that he may judge between them, at once a party of them turns aside. But if the right is on their side they come to him submissively. Is there a sickness in their hearts, or have they fallen into doubt, or do they fear that God and His Messenger will wrong them? No — it is they who are the wrongdoers."

The subject of the new block: the distance between word and deed

With the forty-seventh verse the sūra enters a new block, and the subject of the block builds a link with the matter at the head of the sūra.

The verses describe a stance that says a word and does not do what the word requires. And this lies in the same field as the diagnosis of the sūra's fifteenth verse: there too the distance between word and reality was the subject (taqūlūna bi-afwāhikum mā laysa lakum bihī ʿilm).

VerseThe condition of the word
15There is a word, no knowledge
47There is a word, no deed

I record this as an observation about the word order.

And the same matter was taken up at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/14-17: there a community had said "we have believed", and an answer had come. The two sūras build the same structure — but in al-Nūr the measure is given by a behaviour: what a man does when he is called to judgement.

ٱلَّذِى بَيْنَ ٱلْقَوْلِ وَٱلْفِعْلِ — the test the verses set up

The forty-eighth and forty-ninth verses set up a very concrete test, and this is the most striking side of the verses:

The situationThe behaviour
The ruling may go against themfarīqun minhum muʿriḍūn — they turn aside
The ruling will go in their favouryaʾtū ilayhi mudhʿinīn — they come submissively

The verse, that is, measures a man's attachment to a tribunal by the direction of the ruling that tribunal will give.

And this is an extremely objective measure, which I record as my own reading: whether a man truly trusts an arbiter is known when the arbiter decides against him. Everyone trusts the arbiter who decides in his favour.

أَذْعَنَ — root ذ-ع-ن: the sense the lexicographers record: to submit, to obey, to comply readily. Nāqatun midhʿān — a camel easily driven.

And the choice of the word is worth noting: when they come, they come not unwillingly but submissively. The matter, that is, is not a reluctance; it is a calculation.

أَفِى قُلُوبِهِم مَّرَضٌ — three possibilities, and a fourth answer

The fiftieth verse ranges three possibilities for the cause of this stance, and then gives a fourth answer.

OrderPossibilityWhat it conveys
1a fī qulūbihim maraḍunSickness — a disorder in the heart
2ami'rtābūDoubt — irresolution
3am yakhāfūna an yaḥīfa'llāhu ʿalayhimFear — anxiety at being wronged
The answerbal ulāʾika humu'l-ẓālimūnNone of these: wrongdoing

And that all three possibilities are rejected is worth noting. The first three could have served as an excuse: sickness is a state, doubt a condition of mind, fear a feeling. The verse accepts none of the three and makes a fourth naming.

يَحِيفَ — root ح-ي-ف: the sense the lexicographers record: to lean to one side, to do injustice. Ḥayf — wrong, injustice.

And the place of the third possibility in the arrangement is worth noting, and I record this as my own reading: the verse puts a ground into the mouths of the men, and then rejects it. The text, that is, itself utters the most plausible excuse the other side could offer.

This is a move like the style recorded in al-Ḥujurāt: the objection is not concealed; it is first said and then met.


24/51-52

إِنَّمَا كَانَ قَوْلَ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ إِذَا دُعُوٓا۟ إِلَى ٱللَّهِ وَرَسُولِهِۦ لِيَحْكُمَ بَيْنَهُمْ أَن يَقُولُوا۟ سَمِعْنَا وَأَطَعْنَا وَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ هُمُ ٱلْمُفْلِحُونَ · وَمَن يُطِعِ ٱللَّهَ وَرَسُولَهُۥ وَيَخْشَ ٱللَّهَ وَيَتَّقْهِ فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ هُمُ ٱلْفَآئِزُونَ

Innamā kāna qawla'l-muʾminīna idhā duʿū ila'llāhi wa rasūlihī li-yaḥkuma baynahum an yaqūlū samiʿnā wa aṭaʿnā, wa ulāʾika humu'l-mufliḥūn · Wa man yuṭiʿi'llāha wa rasūlahū wa yakhsha'llāha wa yattaqhi fa-ulāʾika humu'l-fāʾizūn

"When they are called to God and His Messenger, that he may judge between them, the word of the believers is only to say: 'We hear and we obey.' It is they who prosper. And whoever obeys God and His Messenger, and fears God and guards himself against Him — it is they who are the winners."

إِنَّمَا — restriction

إِنَّمَا is in Arabic a particle of ḥaṣr (restriction). The word was analysed at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/10 and 49/15; the note there: the particle confines the ruling to a single thing.

And its work here: the word of the believers is only this; no other option is enumerated.

سَمِعْنَا وَأَطَعْنَا — two verbs

The order of the two verbs is worth noting: first samiʿnā (we hear), then aṭaʿnā (we obey).

And this expression is named in the Qurʾān together with its opposite: samiʿnā wa ʿaṣaynā — "we hear and we disobey" (al-Baqara 2/93; al-Nisāʾ 4/46). The same first word, two opposite second words.

The distinction, that is, lies not in the hearing but in what comes after the hearing.

I record this as an observation about the word order.

And it can be compared with the word in the forty-seventh verse:

VerseWhat is saidWhat follows
47āmannā bi'llāhi wa bi'l-rasūli wa aṭaʿnāthumma yatawallā — then he turns away
51samiʿnā wa aṭaʿnāulāʾika humu'l-mufliḥūn

The same word (aṭaʿnā) occurs in both verses. And the difference lies not in the word but in what comes after it.

I record this contrast as my own reading; the two occurrences of the word stand in the text.

ٱلْمُفْلِحُونَ and ٱلْفَآئِزُونَ — two words

فَلَحَ — root ف-ل-ح: analysed at the verse-ending of the thirty-first verse. To split the soil, to till; and from there, to attain what one seeks.

فَازَ — root ف-و-ز: to be delivered, to win, to reach what one wants. Fawz — gain, deliverance. Mafāza — a place of deliverance; and a desert (a usage of tafāʾul the lexicographers record).

The difference between the two words is recorded in the classical sources thus:

WordRootIts picture
مُفْلِحف-ل-ح — to splitWhat splits the soil and comes out — at the end of a process
فَائِزف-و-ز — to winOne who is delivered, who arrives — the outcome

Two verses one after the other, ending with two different words. I record this as an observation about the words.

And in the second verse three verbs are enumerated: yuṭiʿ (obedience), yakhsha (fear), yattaqi (guarding oneself) — and all three from different roots.

خَشِيَ — root خ-ش-ي: the sense the lexicographers record: a fear grounded on knowledge — the fear that arises from knowing the greatness of what is feared.

ٱتَّقَىٰ — root و-ق-ي: to guard oneself, to keep oneself from a thing. The root was taken up in al-Ḥujurāt as the backbone of that sūra.

The difference between the two words is worth noting: the one conveys a feeling, the other a behaviour.


24/53

وَأَقْسَمُوا۟ بِٱللَّهِ جَهْدَ أَيْمَٰنِهِمْ لَئِنْ أَمَرْتَهُمْ لَيَخْرُجُنَّ قُل لَّا تُقْسِمُوا۟ طَاعَةٌ مَّعْرُوفَةٌ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ خَبِيرٌۢ بِمَا تَعْمَلُونَ

Wa aqsamū bi'llāhi jahda aymānihim la-in amartahum la-yakhrujunn, qul lā tuqsimū, ṭāʿatun maʿrūfa, inna'llāha khabīrun bimā taʿmalūn

"They swore by God with the utmost of their oaths that if you ordered them they would certainly go forth. Say: 'Do not swear. A known obedience is what is asked. God is aware of what you do.'"

جَهْدَ أَيْمَٰنِهِمْ — "the utmost of their oaths"

جَهْد — root ج-ه-د: to spend strength, to exert oneself. Jihād and ijtihād are from the same root. And jahda aymānihim: the utmost degree their oaths can reach.

The expression is a pattern repeated in the Qurʾān (al-Anʿām 6/109; al-Naḥl 16/38; al-Nūr 24/53; Fāṭir 35/42).

And what the places where the pattern occurs have in common is worth noting, and I give this as an observation: in the Qurʾān the expression generally occurs together with a warning that follows the oath.

قُل لَّا تُقْسِمُوا۟ — an unlooked-for answer

Here is the most striking place in the verse.

A group makes an undertaking with the heaviest oath. And the answer is this: "do not swear."

This builds a link with the sūra's twenty-second verse. There too there was a matter of an oath: wa lā yaʾtali — on the first reading, "let them not swear". In both verses an oath is used as an instrument for fixing a behaviour, and in both verses it is rejected.

VerseWhat the oath is forThe ruling
22To fix not givingLā yaʾtali — let them not do it
53To announce what one will doLā tuqsimū — do not swear

I record this as my own reading; the discussion of the oath in the two verses stands in the text.

And the logic common to the two prohibitions is this: an oath is an attempt to put a word in the place of a deed. In both places the sūra asks for the deed.

طَاعَةٌ مَّعْرُوفَةٌ — "a known obedience"

There is disagreement in the classical commentaries over the case of the expression, and it needs transmitting:

ReadingThe word understoodIts sense
1Ahā ṭāʿatun maʿrūfa"What is asked of you is a known obedience"
2Ṭāʿatun maʿrūfatun amthal"A known obedience is more fitting"
3Li-takun ṭāʿatun maʿrūfa"Let there be a known obedience"

I impose no preference, and it is not binding.

But the word maʿrūf may be dwelt on.

مَعْرُوف — root ع-ر-ف: to know, to recognise. And maʿrūf: what is known, what is recognised; and from there "the good" — what everyone knows to be good.

The word is the opposite of munkar, and munkar occurred in the twenty-first verse of this sūra (yaʾmuru bi'l-faḥshāʾi wa'l-munkar).

WordRootIts sense
مُنكَر (21)ن-ك-رNot recognised — found strange
مَعْرُوف (53)ع-ر-فRecognised — known

The two words stand facing each other in the sūra. I record this as an observation about the word order.

And the measure the expression carries is this, which I record as my own reading: a maʿrūf obedience is an obedience whose measure is known. Not one exaggerated in words, but one done in fact and within known bounds.

The verse, that is, sets what is known over against great oaths.


24/54

قُلْ أَطِيعُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَأَطِيعُوا۟ ٱلرَّسُولَ فَإِن تَوَلَّوْا۟ فَإِنَّمَا عَلَيْهِ مَا حُمِّلَ وَعَلَيْكُم مَّا حُمِّلْتُمْ وَإِن تُطِيعُوهُ تَهْتَدُوا۟ وَمَا عَلَى ٱلرَّسُولِ إِلَّا ٱلْبَلَٰغُ ٱلْمُبِينُ

Qul aṭīʿu'llāha wa aṭīʿu'l-rasūl, fa-in tawallaw fa-innamā ʿalayhi mā ḥummila wa ʿalaykum mā ḥummiltum, wa in tuṭīʿūhu tahtadū, wa mā ʿala'l-rasūli illa'l-balāghu'l-mubīn

"Say: 'Obey God, and obey the Messenger.' If you turn away, upon him is only what he has been charged with, and upon you what you have been charged with. If you obey him you will be guided. And nothing is laid upon the Messenger but plain delivery."

حُمِّلَ — to be charged with

Root: ح-م-ل. Its concrete sense is to carry a load. Ḥiml — a load; ḥamūla — what is carried.

The form: the passive of Form II — ḥummila: "it was laid upon him".

And the choice of the form is worth noting: the verb is passive. Responsibility, that is, is named not as something a man chooses for himself but as a load laid upon him.

And the symmetry of the sentence is worth noting:

WhomWhat
ʿalayhiupon himmā ḥummila — what was laid upon him
ʿalaykumupon youmā ḥummiltum — what was laid upon you

The same verb is applied to both sides. The sentence, that is, sets up no superiority; it describes two distinct loads.

ٱلْبَلَٰغُ ٱلْمُبِينُ — the limit

بَلَاغ — root ب-ل-غ: to reach, to arrive. Balagha — he arrived; balāgh — a conveying, a delivering.

And the expression is a note of limit repeated in the Qurʾān: the Messenger's work is the delivering; not the outcome.

The root ب-ي-ن occurs here again (al-mubīn) and was recorded in the table of its distribution through the sūra.


24/55

وَعَدَ ٱللَّهُ ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ مِنكُمْ وَعَمِلُوا۟ ٱلصَّٰلِحَٰتِ لَيَسْتَخْلِفَنَّهُمْ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ كَمَا ٱسْتَخْلَفَ ٱلَّذِينَ مِن قَبْلِهِمْ وَلَيُمَكِّنَنَّ لَهُمْ دِينَهُمُ ٱلَّذِى ٱرْتَضَىٰ لَهُمْ وَلَيُبَدِّلَنَّهُم مِّنۢ بَعْدِ خَوْفِهِمْ أَمْنًا يَعْبُدُونَنِى لَا يُشْرِكُونَ بِى شَيْـًٔا وَمَن كَفَرَ بَعْدَ ذَٰلِكَ فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ هُمُ ٱلْفَٰسِقُونَ

Waʿada'llāhu'lladhīna āmanū minkum wa ʿamilu'l-ṣāliḥāti la-yastakhlifannahum fi'l-arḍi kama'stakhlafa'lladhīna min qablihim wa la-yumakkinanna lahum dīnahumu'lladhi'rtaḍā lahum wa la-yubaddilannahum min baʿdi khawfihim amnā, yaʿbudūnanī lā yushrikūna bī shayʾā, wa man kafara baʿda dhālika fa-ulāʾika humu'l-fāsiqūn

"God has promised those of you who believe and do righteous works that He will surely make them successors in the earth, as He made those before them successors; and that He will surely establish for them their religion, which He has approved for them; and that He will surely give them, after their fear, safety. They will serve Me, associating nothing with Me. And whoever denies after that — it is they who are the transgressors."

A note of method

This verse has been much cited in political arguments through history and today. Those arguments are not entered in this section.

The rule of the method (Method) is plain: no side is taken in current politics. What will be treated is the verse's own wording, its conditions and its arrangement.

The conditions the verse itself lays down

The most striking side of the verse is how many qualifications it sets upon the promise. And these qualifications can be counted from the text:

QualificationExpressionWhat it limits
1alladhīna āmanūFaith
2wa ʿamilu'l-ṣāliḥātDeed — faith alone is not counted sufficient
3minkumFrom within the community addressed
4yaʿbudūnanīService — the state that follows the promise
5lā yushrikūna bī shayʾāNot associating
6wa man kafara baʿda dhālika…A condition is bound to what follows as well

Six qualifications, in a single sentence of promise.

And this is the verse's most important observation on the arrangement, and I record it as my own reading: the promise is given to a community not for its identity but for its attributes. And the attributes are enumerated one by one.

This agrees with the measure recorded in al-Ḥujurāt and set down in the method: "what the verse describes are attributes; whoever bears that attribute is included in it."

ٱسْتَخْلَفَ — to make successors

Root: خ-ل-ف. Its concrete sense is to come behind, to come after. Khalf — what is behind; khalaf — one who comes after; ikhtilāf — a coming one after another, and from there, difference.

And istikhlāf: to bring one after another, to set him in another's place.

The idea of "coming after" in the root of the word is worth noting, and I give this as an observation about the root: khalīfa, in the root of the word, conveys an order of succession — one who comes after another. And the verse says this outright: kama'stakhlafa'lladhīna min qablihim — "as He made those before them successors".

The verse, that is, records within itself that what it gives has been given before as well, and that it is part of a succession.

And this is a thing that must be recorded: to be part of a succession means not to be permanent. One who comes after implies that after him too there will be a successor.

I record this as my own reading; the expression kama'stakhlafa is the wording of the text.

مَكَّنَ — to establish firmly

Root: م-ك-ن. Makān (a place) is from the same root. And tamkīn: to give a thing place and firmness, to settle it.

The object of the word is worth noting: la-yumakkinanna lahum dīnahum — "He will surely establish for them their religion".

What is established firmly, that is, is not a state, a power or a territory — but a religion. This is read from the wording of the text.

And the qualification alladhi'rtaḍā lahum: "which He has approved for them". The subject of the word is God; the party who approves is thus stated as well.

مِّنۢ بَعْدِ خَوْفِهِمْ أَمْنًا — safety

أَمْن — root أ-م-ن. And this is the same root as the word īmān. The analysis of the root was made at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/14; the note there: at the centre of the root stand trust, safety, the lifting of fear.

And the ring within the verse's arrangement is worth noting: the verse begins with alladhīna āmanū and gives a promise with amnā. The same root at the two ends of the verse: the one a condition, the other an outcome.

I record this as an observation about the word order.

The verse's place in the block

That the verse comes after the forty-seventh to the fifty-fourth is worth noting.

Those verses described a stance in which there was a distance between what was said and what was done. And in the fifty-third verse great oaths were rejected and a ṭāʿatun maʿrūfa — a known obedience — was asked for.

The fifty-fifth verse gives the counterpart of what was asked for.

VerseWhat
47-50There is a word, no deed
51-52Word and deed together
53-54The oath is rejected, a known obedience is asked for
55The promise — on the condition of faith and deed

The promise, that is, comes at the end of a series and upon the conditions that series has established.

I record this as my own reading; the order of the verses stands in the text.

وَمَن كَفَرَ بَعْدَ ذَٰلِكَ فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ هُمُ ٱلْفَٰسِقُونَ

Having given the promise, the verse enters one further qualification, and the word is worth noting: al-fāsiqūn.

And the word occurred in the sūra's fourth verse too.

VerseWho is fāsiq
4One who cannot prove his charge
55One who denies after the promise

The same word, at the two ends of the sūra. The sense of the root ف-س-ق — "to come out of the skin" — was analysed at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/6: a thing's being outside where it ought to be inside.

And both occurrences convey a position. I record this as an observation about the word order.


24/56-57

وَأَقِيمُوا۟ ٱلصَّلَوٰةَ وَءَاتُوا۟ ٱلزَّكَوٰةَ وَأَطِيعُوا۟ ٱلرَّسُولَ لَعَلَّكُمْ تُرْحَمُونَ · لَا تَحْسَبَنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟ مُعْجِزِينَ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ وَمَأْوَىٰهُمُ ٱلنَّارُ وَلَبِئْسَ ٱلْمَصِيرُ

Wa aqīmu'l-ṣalāta wa ātu'l-zakāta wa aṭīʿu'l-rasūla laʿallakum turḥamūn · Lā taḥsabanna'lladhīna kafarū muʿjizīna fi'l-arḍ, wa maʾwāhumu'l-nār, wa la-biʾsa'l-maṣīr

"Keep up the prayer, give the alms, and obey the Messenger, that you may be shown mercy. Do not think that those who disbelieve can thwart Him in the earth. Their refuge is the Fire; and an evil journey's end it is!"

Three commands

The fifty-sixth verse gives three concrete commands after the promise of the fifty-fifth: prayer, alms, obedience.

And this threesome occurred in the thirty-seventh verse as well: lā tulhīhim tijāratun wa lā bayʿun ʿan dhikri'llāhi wa iqāmi'l-ṣalāti wa ītāʾi'l-zakāh.

VerseContext
37The attribute of the people in the houses where the lamp is
56The command given after the promise

The same threesome, once as a description and once as a command. I record this as an observation about the word order.

And the verse-ending is worth noting: laʿallakum turḥamūn — "that you may be shown mercy". The same verse-ending occurred at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/10.

لَا تَحْسَبَنَّ — the fourth ḥasiba

The root ح-س-ب occurs for the fourth time in the sūra, and the table given at the thirty-ninth verse is completed here. All four occurrences take as their subject a wrong appraisal.

مُعْجِز — root ع-ج-ز: to be powerless, to be unable. ʿAjz — powerlessness; muʿjiz — one who renders another powerless.

And the form of the word is worth noting: muʿjizīn does not mean "those who escape" — it means "those who render powerless". What is supposed, that is, is not an escape but a comparison of powers.

مَأْوَىٰ — root أ-و-ي: to take refuge, to shelter. Maʾwā — a place of refuge.

And the placing of the word here is a contradiction in terms: maʾwā is a word for a refuge; and in the verse the refuge is said to be the Fire.

I record this as an observation about the word.


24/58

يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ لِيَسْتَـْٔذِنكُمُ ٱلَّذِينَ مَلَكَتْ أَيْمَٰنُكُمْ وَٱلَّذِينَ لَمْ يَبْلُغُوا۟ ٱلْحُلُمَ مِنكُمْ ثَلَٰثَ مَرَّٰتٍ مِّن قَبْلِ صَلَوٰةِ ٱلْفَجْرِ وَحِينَ تَضَعُونَ ثِيَابَكُم مِّنَ ٱلظَّهِيرَةِ وَمِنۢ بَعْدِ صَلَوٰةِ ٱلْعِشَآءِ ثَلَٰثُ عَوْرَٰتٍ لَّكُمْ لَيْسَ عَلَيْكُمْ وَلَا عَلَيْهِمْ جُنَاحٌۢ بَعْدَهُنَّ طَوَّٰفُونَ عَلَيْكُم بَعْضُكُمْ عَلَىٰ بَعْضٍ كَذَٰلِكَ يُبَيِّنُ ٱللَّهُ لَكُمُ ٱلْءَايَٰتِ وَٱللَّهُ عَلِيمٌ حَكِيمٌ

Yā ayyuhā'lladhīna āmanū li-yastaʾdhinkumu'lladhīna malakat aymānukum wa'lladhīna lam yablughu'l-ḥuluma minkum thalātha marrāt, min qabli ṣalāti'l-fajri wa ḥīna taḍaʿūna thiyābakum mina'l-ẓahīrati wa min baʿdi ṣalāti'l-ʿishāʾ, thalāthu ʿawrātin lakum, laysa ʿalaykum wa lā ʿalayhim junāḥun baʿdahunn, ṭawwāfūna ʿalaykum baʿḍukum ʿalā baʿḍ, ka-dhālika yubayyinu'llāhu lakumu'l-āyāt, wa'llāhu ʿalīmun ḥakīm

"O you who believe, let those your right hands possess, and those among you who have not yet reached puberty, ask leave of you at three times: before the dawn prayer, when you lay aside your garments in the heat of noon, and after the night prayer. These are three times of nakedness for you. Beyond these there is no fault upon you or upon them; you go about among one another. Thus God makes His verses clear to you. God is knowing, wise."

The sūra's second discussion of asking leave

The twenty-seventh verse regulated the outer door of the house. The fifty-eighth regulates the inside of the house.

And this is one of the most striking repetitions in the sūra's structure:

24/27-2924/58-59
Whose enteringOne coming from outsideOne living in the house
The doorThe outer door of the houseThe door of a room
The timeAlwaysThree definite times
The verbtastaʾnisū, yuʾdhanali-yastaʾdhin, fa'l-yastaʾdhinū
In betweenThe whole section of light (30-57)

The sūra takes up the matter of asking leave twice, and sets a section of light between them.

I record this as an observation about the word order; the places of the verses stand in the text.

The three times, and the measure by which they are chosen

The most striking side of the verse is what the three chosen times have in common:

TimeExpressionWhat happens
1min qabli ṣalāti'l-fajrBefore the dawn prayer — the time of rising from sleep
2ḥīna taḍaʿūna thiyābakum mina'l-ẓahīraIn the heat of noon — the time of resting, of laying aside one's clothes
3min baʿdi ṣalāti'l-ʿishāʾAfter the night prayer — the time of going to bed

What the three have in common: times when a man may not be dressed.

And the verse says this itself: thalāthu ʿawrātin lakum — "three times of ʿawra for you".

ظَهِيرَة — root ظ-ه-ر: noon, the hottest hour of the day. The word has to do with the sense of "coming out on top" in the root: the time when the sun stands highest.

حُلُم — root ح-ل-م: a dream; and puberty. Ḥulm — a dream. And the word's sense of puberty is a usage the lexicographers record.

From the same root comes ḥilm (forbearance, self-restraint) too, and it was named at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/6, as the opposite of jahl.

عَوْرَٰت — root ع-و-ر

Root: ع-و-ر. This root was analysed at al-Aḥzāb, 33/13; I rely on that treatment. The note there:

عَوْرَة — root ع-و-ر. And the field of sense of the root is wide; what joins all of it is a lack, an opening, an unprotectedness.

And the derivatives given there: aʿwar (one blind in one eye — lacking on one side), ʿāriya (what is borrowed — not owned permanently).

And the use of the word here is worth noting and is striking: the verse uses ʿawra of a time.

Thalāthu ʿawrātin lakum — "three times of ʿawra".

The word, that is, is used here not of a region of the body but of three moments of the day.

This agrees exactly with the root sense of the word, and I record this as my own reading: at the centre of the root stands "unprotectedness". And a man is unprotected at three times of the day. The word is used as the name not of a place but of a state.

And this usage may be compared with ʿawrāti'l-nisāʾ in the thirty-first verse:

VerseʿAwraOf what
31ʿawrāti'l-nisāʾOf a private domain
58thalāthu ʿawrātin lakumOf a time

The same word, on two different planes. I record this as an observation about the word order.

طَوَّٰفُونَ عَلَيْكُم — "you go about among one another"

This is the most human clause in the verse, and its place in the arrangement is worth noting.

Root: ط-و-ف. The same root as ṭāʾifa in the second verse: to turn, to go round about. Ṭawāf is from the same root.

And ṭawwāfūn is an intensive form: "those who go about a great deal".

The function of the clause is this, and I record it as my own reading: immediately after bringing in a restriction, the verse explains why the restriction is confined to three times.

The reason is a fact: people living in the same house pass one another continually. To ask leave at every passing would make life impossible.

And the verse names this not as an excuse but as a normal condition: baʿḍukum ʿalā baʿḍ — "one of you beside another".

The provision, that is, is measured so as not to make life hard.

And this is on the same line as the "note of ease" recorded at al-Baqara, 2/185.

What this says to the present

One. That privacy exists within the house as well.

The most striking side of the verse is that it places privacy not only outside the house but inside it too.

The twenty-seventh verse regulated the entering of another's house. The fifty-eighth regulates the privacy of people living in their own house, with their own family, in respect of one another.

And the addressees of the provision are worth noting: the servants and the children. That is, those within the house least able to object.

Two. And how the measure is built.

The verse builds privacy not as a list of prohibitions but as three times. And what the three times have in common is that a man has not made himself ready.

Its counterpart today is a measure that can be drawn from the wording of the verse: there are moments in which a man has not made himself ready, and those moments are guarded. And those moments are not the whole day — they are countable.

Three. That the limit of the provision is set as well.

Laysa ʿalaykum wa lā ʿalayhim junāḥun baʿdahunn — the time outside the restriction is expressly left free.

This is the sūra's general character, and it was recorded at the twenty-ninth verse: beside every rule, the place where the rule does not apply is written too.


24/59

وَإِذَا بَلَغَ ٱلْأَطْفَٰلُ مِنكُمُ ٱلْحُلُمَ فَلْيَسْتَـْٔذِنُوا۟ كَمَا ٱسْتَـْٔذَنَ ٱلَّذِينَ مِن قَبْلِهِمْ كَذَٰلِكَ يُبَيِّنُ ٱللَّهُ لَكُمْ ءَايَٰتِهِۦ وَٱللَّهُ عَلِيمٌ حَكِيمٌ

Wa idhā balagha'l-aṭfālu minkumu'l-ḥuluma fa'l-yastaʾdhinū kama'staʾdhana'lladhīna min qablihim, ka-dhālika yubayyinu'llāhu lakum āyātih, wa'llāhu ʿalīmun ḥakīm

"And when your children reach puberty, let them ask leave as those before them asked leave. Thus God makes His verses clear to you. God is knowing, wise."

The widening of the restriction

The fifty-eighth verse regulated the asking of leave by children at three times. The fifty-ninth announces that at a certain age this becomes general.

The caseLeave
Before pubertyAt three times
After pubertyAlways — subject to the general ruling of 24/27

And the qualification kama'staʾdhana'lladhīna min qablihim — "as those before them asked leave" — is worth noting: the verse does not lay down a new ruling; it brings them into a ruling that already exists.

I record this as an observation about the word order.

The verse-endings of the two verses

The fifty-eighth and fifty-ninth verses end with the same verse-ending, and there is a small difference between the two:

VerseVerse-ending
58ka-dhālika yubayyinu'llāhu lakumu'l-āyāt
59ka-dhālika yubayyinu'llāhu lakum āyātih

The one with the definite article (al-āyāt), the other with a genitive (āyātih — "His verses").

The difference is small and I build no claim of meaning upon it; I record it only because it stands in the text.

And both these occurrences were counted in the table of the root ب-ي-ن's distribution through the sūra.


24/60

وَٱلْقَوَٰعِدُ مِنَ ٱلنِّسَآءِ ٱلَّٰتِى لَا يَرْجُونَ نِكَاحًا فَلَيْسَ عَلَيْهِنَّ جُنَاحٌ أَن يَضَعْنَ ثِيَابَهُنَّ غَيْرَ مُتَبَرِّجَٰتٍۭ بِزِينَةٍ وَأَن يَسْتَعْفِفْنَ خَيْرٌ لَّهُنَّ وَٱللَّهُ سَمِيعٌ عَلِيمٌ

Wa'l-qawāʿidu mina'l-nisāʾi'llātī lā yarjūna nikāḥan fa-laysa ʿalayhinna junāḥun an yaḍaʿna thiyābahunna ghayra mutabarrijātin bi-zīna, wa an yastaʿfifna khayrun lahunn, wa'llāhu samīʿun ʿalīm

"And as for women advanced in years who have no expectation of marriage, there is no fault in their laying aside their outer garments, so long as they do not display adornment. Yet to keep themselves modest is better for them. God is hearing, knowing."

ٱلْقَوَٰعِد — "those who sit at rest"

Root: ق-ع-د. Its concrete sense is to sit. Qaʿada — he sat; qāʿid — one who sits; maqʿad — a place to sit; qawāʿid — foundations (the place upon which a building sits).

And the sense of the word in this context is a usage the lexicographers record: women advanced in years, who have now sat down from marriage and from bearing.

The word, by its root sense, conveys a stillness. And the verse names this not as a lack but as a condition.

And the verse adds an explanation to the word: allātī lā yarjūna nikāḥan — "those who have no expectation of marriage".

رَجَا — root ر-ج-و: to hope, to expect. And another sense of the word: the edge, the brink of a thing (arjāʾ).

The verse, that is, takes not age but expectation as its measure. This is read from the wording of the text.

مُتَبَرِّجَات — root ب-ر-ج

Root: ب-ر-ج. Its concrete sense is to be seen, to come out, to appear. Burj — a tower, a watch-place (a structure seen from afar). And tabarruj: to show a thing, to display it openly.

The picture in the root of the word is worth noting: a burj is a structure made in order to be seen from afar. And a mutabarrija: one who behaves in order to be seen.

And the work of the qualification is this: the verse brings in an ease, and immediately after limits the purpose of that ease. The dispensation, that is, cannot be turned into a purpose of display.

This does the same work as the qualification lā yaḍribna bi-arjulihinna in the thirty-first verse:

VerseThe qualificationWhat it closes off
31li-yuʿlama mā yukhfīna min zīnatihinnaThe getting round of the rule
60ghayra mutabarrijātin bi-zīnaThe dispensation's changing its purpose

Both qualifications look at a purpose. I record this as my own reading.

وَأَن يَسْتَعْفِفْنَ خَيْرٌ لَّهُنَّ — a dispensation and a preference

The last clause of the verse, having given a dispensation, states a preference: "yet … is better".

And this shows a distinction within the Qurʾān's language of ruling:

LevelExpressionWhat
Dispensationfa-laysa ʿalayhinna junāḥPermitted
Preferencekhayrun lahunnBetter

The two do not conflict: a thing may be permitted and yet something else may be better.

This distinction occurred in many places in the long legislative sections of al-Baqara — especially in the rulings on divorce and on suckling: a permission is given, and then it is said, "such-and-such is better."

ٱسْتَعَفَّ — root ع-ف-ف; analysed at the thirty-third verse. That the word occurs twice in the sūra, for two different groups, is worth noting:

VerseWho
33Those who find no means of marriage
60Those who have no expectation of marriage left

The same command, to two groups at the two ends. I record this as an observation about the word order.


24/61

لَّيْسَ عَلَى ٱلْأَعْمَىٰ حَرَجٌ وَلَا عَلَى ٱلْأَعْرَجِ حَرَجٌ وَلَا عَلَى ٱلْمَرِيضِ حَرَجٌ وَلَا عَلَىٰٓ أَنفُسِكُمْ أَن تَأْكُلُوا۟ مِنۢ بُيُوتِكُمْ أَوْ بُيُوتِ ءَابَآئِكُمْ … فَإِذَا دَخَلْتُم بُيُوتًا فَسَلِّمُوا۟ عَلَىٰٓ أَنفُسِكُمْ تَحِيَّةً مِّنْ عِندِ ٱللَّهِ مُبَٰرَكَةً طَيِّبَةً كَذَٰلِكَ يُبَيِّنُ ٱللَّهُ لَكُمُ ٱلْءَايَٰتِ لَعَلَّكُمْ تَعْقِلُونَ

Laysa ʿala'l-aʿmā ḥarajun wa lā ʿala'l-aʿraji ḥarajun wa lā ʿala'l-marīḍi ḥarajun wa lā ʿalā anfusikum an taʾkulū min buyūtikum aw buyūti ābāʾikum aw buyūti ummahātikum aw buyūti ikhwānikum aw buyūti akhawātikum aw buyūti aʿmāmikum aw buyūti ʿammātikum aw buyūti akhwālikum aw buyūti khālātikum aw mā malaktum mafātiḥahū aw ṣadīqikum, laysa ʿalaykum junāḥun an taʾkulū jamīʿan aw ashtātā, fa-idhā dakhaltum buyūtan fa-sallimū ʿalā anfusikum taḥiyyatan min ʿindi'llāhi mubārakatan ṭayyibah, ka-dhālika yubayyinu'llāhu lakumu'l-āyāti laʿallakum taʿqilūn

"There is no difficulty for the blind, no difficulty for the lame, no difficulty for the sick; nor is there any difficulty for yourselves: no fault in your eating from your own houses, or the houses of your fathers, or the houses of your mothers, or the houses of your brothers, or of your sisters, or of your paternal uncles, or of your paternal aunts, or of your maternal uncles, or of your maternal aunts, or the places whose keys are in your hands, or the house of your friend. Nor is there any fault in your eating together or separately. When you enter houses, give greeting to yourselves, as a blessed and good wish of well-being from God. Thus God makes the verses clear to you; perhaps you will use your reason."

The verse's structure and its place in the sūra

This verse is one of the longest in the sūra, and it does four separate things:

PartExpressionWhat
1laysa ʿala'l-aʿmā … ḥarajThe lifting of a restriction concerning three groups
2an taʾkulū min buyūtikum aw…Eleven houses are enumerated
3an taʾkulū jamīʿan aw ashtātāEating together or separately left free
4fa-sallimū ʿalā anfusikumThe greeting

And the verse's place in the sūra is worth noting: in the twenty-seventh verse the sūra restricted the entering of houses. The sixty-first leaves eating in houses free.

The sūra, that is, gives rulings in two different directions about the same place:

VerseWhatDirection
27-29EnteringRestricted
58-59Entering within the houseRestricted
61Eating togetherLeft free

I record this as my own reading; the subjects of the verses stand in the text.

حَرَج — root ح-ر-ج

Root: ح-ر-ج. This root was analysed in al-Fatḥ; I rely on that treatment. The note there:

The concrete sense of the root: narrowness, constriction. Ḥaraj is a thing's being pressed together, becoming too narrow, becoming impossible to get out of. The concrete usage the lexicographers record is more vivid still: حَرَجَة — a thicket so dense with trees pressed against one another that it cannot be passed through. In the root, that is, there is a picture of impassability.

And the use of the word here agrees exactly with the root sense: the verse announces that a constriction is lifted concerning three groups of people.

And the difference between ḥaraj and junāḥ is worth noting:

WordRootIts picture
حَرَجح-ر-ج — constrictionNarrowness — impassability
جُنَاحج-ن-ح — to inclineDeviation — an error of direction

And the verse uses both: ḥaraj for the three groups, junāḥ for eating together. Two different words; the lifting of two different burdens.

I record this as an observation about the word.

The naming of the three groups

The verse enumerates three groups one by one: al-aʿmā (the blind), al-aʿraj (the lame), al-marīḍ (the sick).

And on why the verse names these groups, more than one explanation is transmitted in the classical commentaries:

ExplanationIts content
1That these people shrank from being at a common table; the verse lifts the misgiving
2That there were people who shrank from eating with them; the verse lifts that misgiving
3That these people, being unable to join the fighting, feared they could take no share of the spoils

I do not impose a preference, and it is not binding.

Yet what the first two explanations have in common can be recorded, and I give this as my own reading: both look at the matter of being shut out of a table.

And its concrete counterpart may be put, in language that does not wound, thus: at a common table the way a person eats is visible. One who does not see may feel with his hand; one who walks with difficulty may come late; one who is ill may eat little, or eat differently. And this visibility may give rise in that person to a diffidence.

The verse lifts this diffidence with a ruling. And the manner of the lifting is worth noting: the three groups are enumerated one by one, and after each of them the word ḥarajun is repeated.

The verse, that is, does not name the three together and pass on with a single ruling — it names each of them separately, and repeats the ruling separately for each.

I record this as my own reading; the repetition itself is the wording of the text, and can be counted.

And a fourth group is added: wa lā ʿalā anfusikum — "nor upon yourselves".

This is the most important move in the word order, and I record it as my own reading: having enumerated the three groups, the verse adds the addressee himself to the same sentence.

The three groups, that is, are not left as a category apart. The same ruling, in the same sentence, with the same word, is extended to everyone: wa lā ʿalā anfusikum.

Eleven houses

The verse enumerates one by one the houses in which food may be eaten, and the list is worth noting:

No.House
1buyūtikum — your own houses
2buyūti ābāʾikum — fathers
3buyūti ummahātikum — mothers
4buyūti ikhwānikum — brothers
5buyūti akhawātikum — sisters
6buyūti aʿmāmikum — paternal uncles
7buyūti ʿammātikum — paternal aunts
8buyūti akhwālikum — maternal uncles
9buyūti khālātikum — maternal aunts
10mā malaktum mafātiḥahū — places whose keys are in your hands
11ṣadīqikumyour friend

I record two observations on the structure of the list:

One. In its kinship the list is symmetrical. Father–mother, brother–sister, paternal uncle–paternal aunt, maternal uncle–maternal aunt. Four pairs, and in each of them two sides.

Two. And the list does not end with kinship. The last two items are not kin: places whose keys are entrusted to one and a friend.

And the addition of the eleventh item to the list is the most striking place in the verse, and I record this as my own reading:

Ṣadīq — root ص-د-ق: truthfulness. The root was analysed at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/15 and 49/17. And ṣadīq: one whose truthfulness has been tried, one who is trusted.

The verse, that is, adds to a list built upon blood a relation with no blood in it — and the name of that relation comes from the root "truthfulness".

And that the word ṣadīq comes in the singular is worth noting: through the whole list every word was plural (ābāʾikum, ummahātikum…); the last word is singular. The explanation the classical lexicographers record is that the word can be used for both the singular and the plural.

فَسَلِّمُوا۟ عَلَىٰٓ أَنفُسِكُمْ — "give greeting to yourselves"

This is the most discussed expression in the verse, and more than one explanation is transmitted in the classical commentaries.

ExplanationWho anfusakum isIts sense
1The people of the houseGreet the people of the house you enter; for they are of you
2One anotherThe believers count one another as "themselves"; the greeting is mutual
3The man himselfIf there is no one in the house, a man greets himself

I do not impose a preference, and it is not binding.

Yet the use of the word anfus in this sūra and in the corpus gives some ground to the second explanation, and I give this as an observation about the word order.

The word had been used in the same office in the twelfth verse as well:

VerseExpressionVerb
al-Nūr 24/12ẓanna … bi-anfusihim khayrāTo think
al-Nūr 24/61fa-sallimū ʿalā anfusikumTo greet
al-Ḥujurāt 49/11wa lā talmizū anfusakumTo find fault

In all three verses the same word is used in an office that counts the members of a community as one another's "selves".

And the measure recorded at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/11 fits here exactly: the note there was that the choosing of anfusakum as the object names the one found fault with not as "the others" but as "yourselves".

Sūrat al-Nūr uses this word three times (6, 12, 61), and in two of them with a positive verb: good opinion (12) and greeting (61).

I record this as my own reading; the places of the words and their verbs stand in the text.

تَحِيَّةً مِّنْ عِندِ ٱللَّهِ مُبَٰرَكَةً طَيِّبَةً

تَحِيَّة — root ح-ي-ي: to live, life. Ḥayāt is from the same root. And taḥiyya: a wish of long life and well-being for someone.

The sense in the root of the word is worth noting, and I give this as an observation about the root: a greeting is, by its root, a wishing of life. In Arabic the word for greeting is a wish of "may you live".

And three qualifiers are added:

QualifierRootWhat
min ʿindi'llāhIts source — from God
mubārakaب-ر-كBlessed — analysed at the thirty-fifth verse: an increase that lasts and shows continuity
ṭayyibaط-ي-بGood, pure — analysed at the twenty-sixth verse

And the return of two of these words within the sūra is worth noting:

WordIts earlier occurrenceHere
mubāraka35 — shajaratin mubārakatin (the olive tree)61 — the greeting
ṭayyiba26 — al-ṭayyibātu li'l-ṭayyibīn61 — the greeting

The qualifier of the tree in the sūra's central verse and the qualifier of the greeting in its last block are the same. I record this as an observation about the word order.

لَعَلَّكُمْ تَعْقِلُونَ — the sūra's only verse-ending of ʿaql

The verse ends with the root ع-ق-ل, and this is the only place in the sūra where that root occurs.

The root was analysed at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/4; the note there: the concrete sense of the root is to bind — the rope that binds a camel's leg is called an ʿiqāl. Reason is a bond, a power of holding; not a capacity but a brake.

And the setting of the verse-ending here makes an interesting relation with the content of the verse, and I record this as my own reading:

The verse is from beginning to end a verse of leaving free: the difficulty is lifted from three groups, eating in eleven houses is left free, eating together or separately is left free.

And the verse-ending comes with a word from the root "to bind".

The two are not opposed but complementary: the limits set through the sūra (leave, the glance, speech) required an ʿaql — a bond. And the sixty-first verse shows where the bond is not.

The verse, that is, says that knowing where the limits end requires the same faculty.

And this agrees with the sūra as a whole: as was recorded at the twenty-ninth verse, beside every rule the sūra writes the place where the rule does not apply.

What this says to the present

One. The regulating of eating together.

What the verse takes up is utterly concrete: who may eat in whose house.

And this is a community's most basic way of forming a bond. To sit at a table is the most visible expression of a relation.

What the verse does is to make this bond easy: eleven doors are counted, and the difficulty is lifted from all of them. And an item with no blood in it is added to the list: a friend.

Two. And the matter of not being shut out.

That the verse names the three groups separately and repeats the ruling for each of them may be read, in language that does not wound, thus: the difficulty of a person who finds it hard to sit at a table is most often not physical but a worry about being seen.

And the verse lifts this worry with a ruling. And then it adds the addressee himself to the same sentence: wa lā ʿalā anfusikum.

The verse, that is, does not leave the three groups in a place apart. The ruling is given not as a separate exemption — but in the same sentence as everyone else.

And this is the most striking side of the verse, and it is read from the text.

Three. Jamīʿan aw ashtātā — "together or separately".

The verse does not impose an order of the table. It leaves both forms free. And this is the stance repeated in the sūra's discussions of manners: a measure is set, but the form is left free.


24/62

إِنَّمَا ٱلْمُؤْمِنُونَ ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ بِٱللَّهِ وَرَسُولِهِۦ وَإِذَا كَانُوا۟ مَعَهُۥ عَلَىٰٓ أَمْرٍ جَامِعٍ لَّمْ يَذْهَبُوا۟ حَتَّىٰ يَسْتَـْٔذِنُوهُ إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ يَسْتَـْٔذِنُونَكَ أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ ٱلَّذِينَ يُؤْمِنُونَ بِٱللَّهِ وَرَسُولِهِۦ فَإِذَا ٱسْتَـْٔذَنُوكَ لِبَعْضِ شَأْنِهِمْ فَأْذَن لِّمَن شِئْتَ مِنْهُمْ وَٱسْتَغْفِرْ لَهُمُ ٱللَّهَ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ غَفُورٌ رَّحِيمٌ

Innama'l-muʾminūna'lladhīna āmanū bi'llāhi wa rasūlihī wa idhā kānū maʿahū ʿalā amrin jāmiʿin lam yadhhabū ḥattā yastaʾdhinūh, inna'lladhīna yastaʾdhinūnaka ulāʾika'lladhīna yuʾminūna bi'llāhi wa rasūlih, fa-idha'staʾdhanūka li-baʿḍi shaʾnihim fa'dhan li-man shiʾta minhum wa'staghfir lahumu'llāh, inna'llāha ghafūrun raḥīm

"The believers are only those who believe in God and His Messenger and who, when they are with him upon a matter that gathers them, do not depart until they have asked his leave. Those who ask your leave — it is they who believe in God and His Messenger. So when they ask your leave for some affair of their own, give leave to whom you will of them, and ask God's forgiveness for them. God is forgiving, merciful."

The sūra's third discussion of asking leave

The sūra takes up the matter of asking leave for the third time — and this time what is at issue is not a place but an affair.

VerseLeave for whatThe limit
27-29To enter a houseThe door
58-59To enter a roomThe room door, three times
62To leave an affairA gathering affair

And the third looks in a direction different from the others: the first two ask leave to enter, the third to go out.

I record this as my own reading; the verbs of the three verses stand in the text.

أَمْرٍ جَامِعٍ — "a gathering affair"

جَامِع — root ج-م-ع: to gather, to bring together. Jamāʿa, jumuʿa, jāmiʿ are from the same root. And jāmiʿ: that which gathers.

And the word order of the expression is worth noting: amrin jāmiʿ — "a gathering affair".

The qualifier of the affair, that is, is not "important" or "great" — but gathering. What defines the affair is that it brings people together.

And the word amr comes indefinite: which affair it is is not said. This makes the ruling general.

In the classical commentaries various examples are transmitted as to what this expression intends — a collective consultation, preparation for war, the Friday assembly. I do not impose a preference; and the word's coming indefinite suggests that none of the examples exhausts the expression.

لَّمْ يَذْهَبُوا۟ حَتَّىٰ يَسْتَـْٔذِنُوهُ — leave to depart

And the most striking side of the verse is the measure it sets up.

The verse regulates not the joining of a gathering — but the leaving of it once one has joined.

And this is a thing worth recording, and I give it as my own reading: in a common affair, joining is visible — it is plain who came. Leaving may not be visible. To go quietly out of a crowd is easier than not to come at all.

And the sixty-third verse will say this outright: alladhīna yatasallalūna minkum liwādhā — "those among you who slip away by stealth".

The link with al-Ḥujurāt, 49/1

This verse forms a direct pair with the first verse of Sūrat al-Ḥujurāt, and the link must be recorded.

What was recorded at Ḥujurāt 49/1 was this:

lā tuqaddimū bayna yadayi'llāhi wa rasūlih — do not put yourselves forward before God and His Messenger. … the prohibition is set not upon a kind of behaviour but upon a positioning.

And the verses of the two sūras regulate the two ends of an order of common work:

al-Ḥujurāt 49/1al-Nūr 24/62
What it regulatesPutting oneself forwardDeparting
DirectionForward — before the lineOutward — from the assembly
The verblā tuqaddimūlam yadhhabū ḥattā yastaʾdhinūh
What is askedTo waitTo ask leave
The kind of noteA prohibitionA condition
Its link with faithAn address: yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanūA definition: innama'l-muʾminūn

The two verses are about a person's position within a community: the one regulates going before the line, the other going out of it.

And the logic recorded in al-Ḥujurāt works here too: "when a community grows, where each stands produces a hierarchy of itself."

I record this comparison as my own reading; the wording of the two verses stands in the text.

إِنَّمَا ٱلْمُؤْمِنُونَ — a sentence of definition

The verse opens with innamā and sets up a definition: "the believers are only …".

And the content of the definition is worth noting: two conditions are enumerated, and the second is a behaviour.

ConditionExpressionKind
1āmanū bi'llāhi wa rasūlihBelief
2lam yadhhabū ḥattā yastaʾdhinūhBehaviour

And the same pattern had occurred at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/15 as well: innama'l-muʾminūna'lladhīna āmanū bi'llāhi wa rasūlihī thumma lam yartābū wa jāhadū…

Both sūras use the same pattern, and both add a behaviour to the definition of faith.

SūraThe behaviour added
al-Ḥujurāt 49/15Not falling into doubt, and struggling with wealth and life
al-Nūr 24/62Not leaving a common affair without leave

And how small the behaviour in al-Nūr looks is worth noting, and I record this as my own reading: what is added to the definition of faith is going out of an assembly with leave. A rule of manners, that is, which looks everyday and small, is set inside a sentence of definition.

This agrees with the measure recorded in the Ḥujurāt section: "the Qurʾān builds religiousness not as a list of acts of worship but as an order of behaviour."

فَأْذَن لِّمَن شِئْتَ مِنْهُمْ — the leaving of it to discretion

The verse leaves the authority to give leave to a discretion: li-man shiʾta — "to whom you will".

The rule, that is, is set upon the side that asks leave; on the side that gives leave there is no obligation.

I record this as an observation about the word order.

وَٱسْتَغْفِرْ لَهُمُ ٱللَّهَ — an unexpected note

This is the most unexpected sentence in the verse.

The one who asks leave is, by the verse's own definition, counted a believer (inna'lladhīna yastaʾdhinūnaka ulāʾika'lladhīna yuʾminūn). And in spite of this the verse asks that forgiveness be sought for them.

In the classical commentaries the reason for this has been dwelt upon, and the explanations transmitted are these:

ExplanationIts content
1To depart from a common affair carries a lack, even with leave
2Asking forgiveness is a general note accompanying the act of giving leave
3The note looks at a possible weakness in the intention of the one asking leave

I do not impose a preference, and it is not binding.

Yet something may be recorded in the word order, and I give this as my own reading: the verse does not leave the granting of leave as a closing. Leave is given, and after it a prayer is made. The transaction, that is, passes beyond a legal permission.


24/63

لَّا تَجْعَلُوا۟ دُعَآءَ ٱلرَّسُولِ بَيْنَكُمْ كَدُعَآءِ بَعْضِكُم بَعْضًا قَدْ يَعْلَمُ ٱللَّهُ ٱلَّذِينَ يَتَسَلَّلُونَ مِنكُمْ لِوَاذًا فَلْيَحْذَرِ ٱلَّذِينَ يُخَالِفُونَ عَنْ أَمْرِهِۦٓ أَن تُصِيبَهُمْ فِتْنَةٌ أَوْ يُصِيبَهُمْ عَذَابٌ أَلِيمٌ

Lā tajʿalū duʿāʾa'l-rasūli baynakum ka-duʿāʾi baʿḍikum baʿḍā, qad yaʿlamu'llāhu'lladhīna yatasallalūna minkum liwādhā, fa'l-yaḥdhari'lladhīna yukhālifūna ʿan amrihī an tuṣībahum fitnatun aw yuṣībahum ʿadhābun alīm

"Do not treat the Messenger's calling among you as your calling of one another. God knows those of you who slip away and steal off. Let those who go against his command beware lest a trial befall them, or a painful punishment befall them."

دُعَآءَ ٱلرَّسُولِ — an expression on which there is disagreement

On what the expression means, two readings are transmitted in the classical commentaries:

ReadingIts sense
1The Messenger's call — when he calls, do not treat it as one of you calling another
2Calling out to the Messenger — do not call out to him as you call out to one another

Both readings are transmitted in the classical sources; I do not impose a preference.

And the second reading forms a direct link with al-Ḥujurāt, 49/2: there it was said wa lā tajharū lahū bi'l-qawli ka-jahri baʿḍikum li-baʿḍ — "do not raise your voice to him as you raise it to one another".

The pattern of the two verses is almost the same:

VerseExpression
al-Ḥujurāt 49/2ka-jahri baʿḍikum li-baʿḍ
al-Nūr 24/63ka-duʿāʾi baʿḍikum baʿḍā

The same structure, the same pattern of comparison. I record this as an observation about the word order.

يَتَسَلَّلُونَلِوَاذًا — to slip away

This is the most concrete word in the verse, and the two words together set up a picture.

تَسَلَّلَ — root س-ل-ل: its concrete sense is to draw a thing slowly out of its sheath. Salla'l-sayfa — he drew the sword. And tasallul: to go out slowly, without being noticed.

The picture in the root of the word is worth noting: a sword's coming out of its scabbard is a silent and gradual movement. From the same root come sulāla (the essence of a thing, what is drawn off and filtered out of it) and, in Turkish, sülale — "lineage".

لِوَاذ — root ل-و-ذ: to take refuge, to hide behind something. Lādha bihī — he took refuge with him; malādh — a refuge.

And the picture the two words set up together is this: the man goes out, and as he goes he hides behind something — behind another person, in the shadow of a crowd.

The verse, that is, does not merely say "to flee": it describes the manner of the fleeing as well.

I record this as my own reading; the concrete senses of the two roots stand in the lexicon.

And this is the counterpart of the note in the sixty-second verse:

VerseBehaviourHow
62yastaʾdhinūnakaBy asking leave openly
63yatasallalūna … liwādhāIn secret, hiding behind

The two verses set two forms of the same act — departing — face to face. I record this as an observation about the word order.

And the note qad yaʿlamu'llāh: it announces that the hiding does not work for the one who hides.

فِتْنَة — an affliction, or a testing?

Root: ف-ت-ن. This root was analysed in the discussion of al-Baqara, 2/191 and in al-Burūj; the note there: to melt gold in fire and so test its purity. From this arise both the sense of "trial" and the sense of "pressure, affliction".

And on the sense of the word here there is disagreement in the classical commentaries:

ExplanationIts sense
1A worldly affliction — a hardship that befalls one
2A corruption in the heart — a slipping in a man's inward state

I do not impose a preference, and it is not binding.

And the verb is worth noting: tuṣībahum — root ص-و-ب. This root was analysed at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/6; the note there: to hit, to reach the target. Muṣība is from the same root.

And in al-Ḥujurāt the same verb was used of people acting on a false report doing harm to a community: an tuṣībū qawman bi-jahālatin.

SūraWho strikesWhom
al-Ḥujurāt 49/6PeopleA community
al-Nūr 24/63A trial / a punishmentPersons

The same verb, in two directions. I record this as an observation about the word order.


24/64

أَلَآ إِنَّ لِلَّهِ مَا فِى ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتِ وَٱلْأَرْضِ قَدْ يَعْلَمُ مَآ أَنتُمْ عَلَيْهِ وَيَوْمَ يُرْجَعُونَ إِلَيْهِ فَيُنَبِّئُهُم بِمَا عَمِلُوا۟ وَٱللَّهُ بِكُلِّ شَىْءٍ عَلِيمٌ

A-lā inna li'llāhi mā fi'l-samāwāti wa'l-arḍ, qad yaʿlamu mā antum ʿalayh, wa yawma yurjaʿūna ilayhi fa-yunabbiʾuhum bimā ʿamilū, wa'llāhu bi-kulli shayʾin ʿalīm

"Know that to God belongs whatever is in the heavens and the earth. He knows what state you are in. On the day they are returned to Him, He will tell them what they did. God is knowing of all things."

The sūra's seal

The sūra closes with the word of knowing, and this agrees with its whole subject.

The root ع-ل-م occurs twice in the closing verse: qad yaʿlamu and ʿalīm.

قَدْ يَعْلَمُ مَآ أَنتُمْ عَلَيْهِ — "what state you are in"

The expression is worth noting: mā antum ʿalayh — "that which you are upon".

The verse, that is, does not say "what you have done"; it says your state. What is named is not an act but a position.

And this agrees with a way of looking repeated through the whole sūra, and I record this as my own reading:

Most of the things diagnosed through the sūra are not acts but positions and inclinations:

VerseThe diagnosisKind
4, 55al-fāsiqūnPosition — being outside the skin
15taḥsabūnahū hayyināAn appraisal
19yuḥibbūna an tashīʿaAn inclination
50bal ulāʾika humu'l-ẓālimūnPosition
64mā antum ʿalayhState

The sūra regulates acts too — but it sets its diagnoses upon positions.

I record this as my own reading; the places of the words stand in the text and can be counted.

فَيُنَبِّئُهُم بِمَا عَمِلُوا۟ — the root nabaʾ

نَبَّأَ — root ن-ب-أ. And this is the sūra's last surprise of vocabulary.

The root was analysed in detail at al-Ḥujurāt, 49/6; the note there: beneath the root lies the idea of coming from one place to another, of being carried; a report is what is carried. And the sentence drawn out in the Nabaʾ section: "A nabaʾ is a report upon the hearing of which something must change."

And at the sūra's close this root comes as a verb of telling: fa-yunabbiʾuhum bimā ʿamilū — "He will tell them what they did".

And this forms a ring with the sūra as a whole, and I record this as my own reading:

The sūra had been occupied with the reports people carry about one another — reports unproven, passing from tongue to tongue, supposed to be of no weight. And the sūra closes with an act of telling.

The report within the sūraThe report at the sūra's end
Its sourceManGod
Its groundmā laysa lakum bihī ʿilm (15) — there is no knowledgewa'llāhu bi-kulli shayʾin ʿalīm (64) — knowing of all things
Its subjectAnother's conditionbimā ʿamilū — a man's own deed
Its timeNow, in the mouthyawma yurjaʿūna ilayh — the day of return

The sūra, that is, closes with a report that needs no verification the discussion it had opened with a report that could not be verified.

I record this reading as my own reading; the roots of the two expressions and their places stand in the text.

وَٱللَّهُ بِكُلِّ شَىْءٍ عَلِيمٌ

The same verse-ending occurred at the end of the thirty-fifth verse too — the verse of the likeness of light.

VerseVerse-ending
35wa'llāhu bi-kulli shayʾin ʿalīm
64wa'llāhu bi-kulli shayʾin ʿalīm

The sūra's central verse and its last verse end with the same sentence.

I record this as an observation about the word order; the sameness of the two verse-endings stands in the text and can be verified.


The sūra as a whole — a look back

The sūra has a single business: where the line is to be drawn

When the sixty-four verses have been read, it can be said that the sūra's seemingly scattered subjects meet upon a single axis.

In Sūrat al-Nūr there are these: penal rulings, the procedure of testimony, liʿān, the unravelling of a slander, a call to pardon, the manners of entering a house, the glance and the covering, marriage and freedom, a likeness of light, two counter-likenesses, the signs of the universe, obedience, a promise, the manners of asking leave within the house, the manners of eating, and the manners of the assembly.

And the whole of this list can be tied to one question: where does a person's own domain end?

BlockThe domainWhat crosses the line
2-10Body and standing — ruling and proofAn unproven imputation
11-26Standing — the word spokenA report carried from tongue to tongue
27-29The houseEntering without leave
30-31Body and what is privateThe glance and the showing
32-34Impossibility — one who cannot marry, one who has no freedom, one who is compelledCompulsion, and the shutting of the door
35-45(The opposite pole: light, darkness, the universe)
46-57The space between word and deedNot doing what one says
58-60The room and the hourEntering at the wrong hour
61-64The table and the assemblyShutting out, and departing in secret

And the gap in the middle of the table is worth noting: between the thirty-fifth and the forty-fifth verses there is no question of a limit. There is a light there.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the subjects of the blocks: while the sūra is counting limits it sets a likeness in the middle of them, and that likeness is a likeness of a guarded light.

Two kinds of command: holding back, and opening

The sūra's commands are of two kinds, and the two follow one another with regularity.

A command of holding backThe command of opening that follows at once
4 — A penalty for the one who imputes5 — The door of repentance
11-21 — The condemning of the slander22Go on giving; pardon
27-28 — Do not enter a house without leave; turn back29 — Uninhabited houses are free
30-31 — Lower the glance32Give in marriage
33 — Keep chaste33Make the contract of freedom; give them property
58 — Ask leave at three times58 — Free at the other times
61(no restriction)61Eleven doors are opened
62-63 — Do not depart without leave62Give leave to whom you will

The sūra leaves no restriction standing alone.

I record this as my own reading; the order of the verses and their content stand in the text.

The roots that hold the sūra together

The reason the sūra does not fall apart despite its length is that the same roots return in different blocks.

RootThe verses where it occursWhat it does
ب-ي-ن (to separate)1, 12, 18, 25, 34, 46, 54, 58, 59, 61Ten times — the name of the sūra's own work
ن-و-ر (light)35 (five times), 40 (twice)The centre, and its opposite
ع-ل-م (to know)15, 19, 28, 29, 32, 33, 35, 41, 58, 59, 63, 64The presence and the absence of knowledge
ش-ه-د (testimony)2, 4, 6, 8, 13, 24The person → the declaration → his own limbs
ب-ص-ر (to see)30, 31, 37, 43, 44The narrowing of the glance → the taking away of sight → those who can see
ب-ي-ت (house)27, 29, 36, 61The house not entered → the house raised up → the house eaten in
أ-ذ-ن (leave)28, 36, 58, 59, 62The householder's leave → God's leave → leave of the assembly
ز-ك-و (to be purified)21, 28, 30, 37, 56The result of holding back
ح-س-ب (to suppose)11, 15, 39, 57All four a wrong appraisal
ر-م-ي (to cast)4, 6, 23The verb of imputation
ح-ص-ن (fortress)4, 23, 33What is guarded
ف-س-ق (to come out of the skin)4, 55At the sūra's two ends; announcing a position
ط-و-ف (to go about)2 (ṭāʾifa), 58 (ṭawwāfūn)The group of witnesses / the people of the house
ض-ر-ب (to strike)31 (twice), 35 (yaḍribu'l-amthāl), 43In three separate offices
ك-و-د (kāda — to draw near)35, 40, 43All three a drawing near to a threshold
ن-ف-س (anfus)6, 12, 61An oath → good opinion → a greeting
ق-و-ل (speech)12, 15, 16, 26, 47, 51, 53, 54The sūra's densest root

The three most striking rows in the table are these:

One. That the root ب-ي-ن occurs ten times. The sūra names its work "separating", and repeats it ten times. And this is the common work of all the sūra's rulings: to separate what belongs to what.

Two. That all four occurrences of the root ح-س-ب announce a wrong appraisal. The fault the sūra diagnoses is not ill will — but a wrong weighing.

Three. That the three occurrences of the root ن-ف-س trace a path: in the sixth verse the subject of an oath, in the twelfth the object of good opinion, in the sixty-first the addressee of a greeting. The word widens from a man's own self toward the whole of the community.

I record this table and these readings as my own observation; the places of the words can be counted and verified in the text.

The verse-endings

The endings of the sūra's verses show its character. The count below is my own observation, and can be made one by one.

Kind of verse-endingHow many versesExamples
A pair of divine namesAbout twentyghafūrun raḥīm (5, 22, 33, 62), ʿalīmun ḥakīm (18, 58, 59), raʾūfun raḥīm (20)
A note of forgiveness / mercy / repentanceEight5, 10, 20, 22, 31, 33, 56, 62
Announcing a rulingSix4 (al-fāsiqūn), 13 (al-kādhibūn), 50 (al-ẓālimūn), 55 (al-fāsiqūn)
A promiseFour51 (al-mufliḥūn), 52 (al-fāʾizūn), 38
A sentence of purposeFivelaʿallakum tadhakkarūn (1, 27), laʿallakum tufliḥūn (31), laʿallakum turḥamūn (56), laʿallakum taʿqilūn (61)

I record two observations:

One. The names ghafūr and raḥīm come together four times in the sūra, and all four times after a heavy ruling: after the penalty for slander (5), in the call to pardon (22), in the prohibition of compulsion (33), in the manners of the assembly (62).

Two. The block that carries the sūra's heaviest rulings (2-10) closes not with a ruling but with a pair of names: tawwābun ḥakīm (10).

The sūra, that is, lays down heavy rulings, and each time sets a name behind the ruling.

Al-Nūr and al-Ḥujurāt: two texts on one subject

The place al-Ḥujurāt holds in this commentary as the sūra of manners was recorded. Al-Nūr is the second and longer text on the same matter.

A comparison of the two sūras taken together:

49. al-Ḥujurāt24. al-Nūr
Length18 verses64 verses
SubjectThe manners of behaviourManners and ruling
SanctionNoneThere is one (2, 4)
Procedure of proofNone — "verify" (49/6)There is one — four witnesses (24/4, 13)
Kind of limitVoice, word, supposition, prying, backbitingWord, body, glance, entering, hour
The central wordḥujurāt — an enclosed spacenūr — light
StructureA circle narrowing from outside inwardAn alternating sequence of restriction and opening
What stands at its centreinnama'l-muʾminūna ikhwa (49/10)The likeness of light (24/35)
The sealwa'llāhu baṣīrun bimā taʿmalūn (49/18)wa'llāhu bi-kulli shayʾin ʿalīm (24/64)

And the division of labour on the matters they share:

Matteral-Ḥujurātal-Nūr
The verifying of a report49/6fa-tabayyanū24/12-13if there are not four witnesses, reject it
Supposition49/12ijtanibū kathīran mina'l-ẓann24/12ẓanna … bi-anfusihim khayrā
Prying49/12lā tajassasū24/27-29, 58-59 — the door and the hour
Spreading by tongue49/12lā yaghtab24/15, 19 — talaqqī and shuyūʿ
A man's claim about his own identity49/14-1724/47-53the space between word and deed
The manners of the assembly49/1-5putting oneself forward, the voice, the door24/62-63departing, and slipping away in secret
The anfus pattern49/11lā talmizū anfusakum24/12, 61 — good opinion and the greeting

What the two sūras build together is this, and I record it as my own reading:

Al-Ḥujurāt regulates the form of behaviour; al-Nūr binds the outcome of behaviour to a procedure.

In al-Ḥujurāt supposition is forbidden but no penalty is set — because supposition is not visible. In al-Nūr, on the other hand, supposition in its outward state — imputation — is bound to a procedure and to a sanction.

And the two sūras have the same backbone: a word is stopped before it enters circulation. Al-Ḥujurāt does this by waiting; al-Nūr, by closing the door.

What the sūra says to the present — as a whole

What each verse says to the present has been written verse by verse; here I record only what can be said about the sūra as a whole.

One. The placing of the accusation itself as an act.

The most original move in the sūra's arrangement lies between the second and the fourth verses: two verses after a penalty is set for an act, imputing that act to someone is itself bound to a penalty.

And the logic of this opens out in the rest of the sūra: the nineteenth verse says that what is condemned is not the act but the wish that it be spread.

This is a structure that prevents a society from using its own penal order as a weapon against itself. And this structure is built out of the text itself.

Two. That the obligation is everywhere set upon the receiver and upon the one who draws near.

The same choice is repeated through the sūra:

VerseUpon whom the obligation lies
4Upon the one who imputes — the burden of proof
12, 15Upon the one who receives the report — to reject it
27Upon the one who comes to the door — to ask leave
30-31Upon the one who looks — to lower the glance
62Upon the one who departs — to ask leave

In all five places the obligation lies not upon the one who needs to be guarded — but upon the one who draws near to the line.

I record this as my own reading; the addressees of the verses stand in the text.

Three. The setting of "supposing it of no weight" at the centre.

The sūra's sharpest diagnosis is in the fifteenth verse: wa taḥsabūnahū hayyinan wa huwa ʿinda'llāhi ʿaẓīm.

And the subject of the diagnosis is not an act but an error of weighing. The sūra addresses not the one who does the evil but the one who reckons the evil small.

This is a measure worth thinking about today, and it may be put, in language that does not wound, thus: to feel no hesitation while saying a word shows that the word is light for the one who says it. And the verse says where the lightness comes from as well: from no one's ever seeing the sum.

Four. And a note: how this sūra must not be read.

Sūrat al-Nūr is a text well suited to describing other people. Within it there are slanderers, spreaders of gossip, those who do not hold their glance, those who do not do what they say, those who slip away in secret.

And the sūra is one of the texts that most plainly prevents this from being done:

  • The eleventh verse: ʿuṣbatun minkum — from among you.
  • The fourth verse: the one who cannot prove his imputation is the party who faces the penalty.
  • The nineteenth verse: what is condemned is the wishing that the foul thing be spread.
  • The twenty-sixth verse: ulāʾika mubarraʾūna mimmā yaqūlūn — the section closes not by sorting people into classes but with the voiding of a word.
  • The thirty-first verse: at the end of the rulings the address opens out to all the believers and calls them to repentance: wa tūbū ila'llāhi jamīʿan.
  • The twenty-first verse: mā zakā minkum min aḥadin abadā — not one of you could ever have been purified on his own.

Six verses, in six separate places, close the same door.

And the measure recorded in al-Ḥujurāt holds here too: the text is an instrument of diagnosis, and the diagnosis is applied first to oneself.

The aptness of the sūra's name

The sūra's name is taken from the thirty-fifth verse, and the choice belongs to tradition. But I can say that the choice is apt; I record this as my own reading.

Its ground is this: the sūra is a text built upon the eye.

VerseWhat the eye does
2wa'l-yashhad … ṭāʾifatunit sees
4, 13arbaʿati shuhadāʾit is required to have seen
15It says what it has not seen
19The foulness that is wished to be seen
24The limbs bear witness
27-29What ought not to be seen is not entered upon
30-31The glance is lowered
35A light is kindled
37The eyes are turned about
40He cannot even see his hand
43The lightning takes away the sight
44Ulu'l-abṣār — those who can see
58The three times that ought not to be seen

In thirteen places, a matter of seeing.

And the work the sūra does can be read from this table: it narrows the eye's power (30-31), limits the eye's authority (4, 13, 27), shows the eye's limits (40, 43) — and sets a lamp in the middle of it all (35).

The sūra, that is, tries to lessen looking and to increase seeing.

I record this reading as my own reading; the places of the verses and their contents stand in the text and can be counted.


Where this section does not speak with certainty

At many points through the text definite language was deliberately not used; the reader needs to know these places.

  • No definite date was given for the year of the sūra's revelation. The estimates transmitted in the sources were named, and it was stated that there is disagreement.
  • Three explanations of the origin of the word sūra were given in a table; none of them was preferred.
  • The variant reading of the word faraḍnāhā in 24/1 was recorded; no reciter's name was given, because I cannot give one with certainty.
  • The explanations of the woman's being named first in 24/2 were given in a table; no preference was made.
  • The juristic disagreements arising from 24/2 (the case of a married person, banishment, the way the offence is established, the number of the ṭāʾifa) were conveyed in the language of transmission and in a table. None of them is this text's preference, and none of them is binding. The debate of criminal law and current applications were not entered into at all.
  • Four readings of the kind of sentence 24/3 is (a statement / a performative / a censure / a limited event) were given in a table; no preference was made and no legal ruling was issued.
  • The scope of the word muḥṣanāt in 24/4, and whether the ruling covers men as well, were given as transmitted opinions; no preference was made.
  • What the exception in 24/5 refers back to (the discussion of istithnāʾ baʿda jumal in legal theory) was given as two opinions; no legal ruling was issued and no preference was made.
  • In the discussion of liʿān in 24/6-9 only the structure and the language were treated. None of the juristic consequences concerning the state of the marriage, lineage, coming together again, and refusal to swear was conveyed, because they are not the subject of this section.
  • Three explanations of the difference between laʿna and ghaḍab in 24/7 and 24/9 were given; no preference was imposed.
  • The difference of syntactic analysis in 24/8-9 was recorded; no reciter's name was given.
  • In the section of the ifk (11-26) no personal name was given, no detail of any narration was conveyed, and the disputes over who was accused were not entered into. The reason was written plainly in the text: the verses are nameless from beginning to end, and the twenty-sixth verse closes the matter by saying mubarraʾūna mimmā yaqūlūn. For this section to be written by doing the very thing the verse it treats forbids would have been an inconsistency.
  • The variant reading kibrahū in 24/11 was recorded; no reciter's name was given.
  • Two readings of whom the expression bi-anfusihim in 24/12 refers to were given; no preference was made.
  • Three explanations of the function of the note ʿinda'llāh in 24/13 were given; no preference was made.
  • Two readings of what the expression fi'l-dunyā wa'l-ākhira in 24/14 attaches to were given; no preference was made.
  • The variant reading talaqqawnahū / taliqūnahū in 24/15 was given in a table; no reciter's name was written. The interpretation that the two readings complete each other was recorded as my own reading.
  • Three explanations of the function of the expression subḥānaka in 24/16 were given; no preference was imposed.
  • Two readings of the verb yaʾtali in 24/22 (an oath / a falling short) were given in a table; no preference was made. That the word is read in a different form was recorded too, and no reciter's name was given. On the link of the root أ-ل-و with the derivative ālāʾ, it was plainly stated that the lexicographers are not agreed, and no connection was built upon it.
  • The ways 24/26 may be understood (words / persons / acts) were given in a table; no preference was imposed. And that no ruling about persons can be drawn from the verse was stated, on the ground of the verse's own second half (mubarraʾūna mimmā yaqūlūn) and of the subject of the section in which it stands.
  • Three explanations of the concrete sense of the word istiʾnās in 24/27 were given; no preference was imposed.
  • Three explanations of the function of the particle min in 24/30 were given. That the partitive explanation is widespread in the classical commentaries was recorded, but no preference was imposed. The comparison made with Luqmān, 31/19 was given not as a ruling but as an observation about structure.
  • Four explanations of the scope of the expression mā ẓahara minhā in 24/31 were given in a table; no preference was made, no legal ruling was issued, and it was recorded that none is binding.
  • The points at which the rulings drawn from 24/31 in the schools of law diverge were shown in a table. None of them is this text's preference, and none of them is binding. Current debates about covering, and politics, were not entered into at all, and the reader was not scolded.
  • The historical information about the use of the khimār in that period was conveyed as a note widely transmitted in the classical commentaries; no chain of transmission and no attribution to a source were given, because I cannot give them with certainty.
  • That the note in aradna taḥaṣṣunan in 24/33 is not a condition was given as an explanation widely transmitted in the classical commentaries, and it was further stated that both of its grounds can be read from the text.
  • In the discussion of kitāba in 24/33 no juristic detail was entered into; the disagreements over the kind of the command, the binding force of the contract, and the amount of property to be given were passed over with no more than a statement that they exist.
  • Four orientations concerning the first sentence of 24/35 (the Illuminator / the light of guidance / the source of being / tafwīḍ) were given in a table; none was preferred, and it was recorded that none is binding. The note of transcendence was set down at the very beginning and plainly: the expression cannot be understood in the sense of a bodily light.
  • On the origin of the word mishkāt in 24/35 it was stated that some of the lexicographers record it as having passed in from another language; nothing definite was said.
  • The readings and the origin of the word durriyy in 24/35 were given in a table; no reciter's name was written.
  • Three explanations of the expression lā sharqiyya wa lā gharbiyya in 24/35 were given; no preference was imposed.
  • The discussion of the variant readings and the subject of the verb yūqadu in 24/35 was recorded; no reciter's name was given and no preference was made.
  • Three explanations of what the expression nūrun ʿalā nūr is were given; no preference was imposed.
  • The table of the offices of the likeness's eight elements, and the reading that "the likeness tells how a light is guarded", are my own reading, and have not been attributed to any commentator. That the elements are in the verse is the wording of the text.
  • Two readings of the subject of the sentence qad ʿalima ṣalātahū wa tasbīḥah in 24/41 were given; no preference was made.
  • Three explanations of the expression min jibālin fīhā min baradin in 24/43 were given; no preference was imposed. And no claim of a "foretelling" of modern meteorology was drawn from this verse — per the method (Method), no hunting for scientific miracles is done. The same note was set down for the expression min māʾ in 24/45 as well.
  • Three suppositions of the syntactic analysis of the expression ṭāʿatun maʿrūfa in 24/53 were given; no preference was imposed.
  • No current political assessment was made concerning 24/55. The six qualifications the verse itself lays down were shown in a table, and it was recorded that the promise is bound to attributes and not to identity.
  • Three explanations of why the three groups in 24/61 are named were given; no preference was imposed. The discussion was treated in language that does not wound, and without setting up a ruling about a group.
  • Three explanations of the expression fa-sallimū ʿalā anfusikum in 24/61 were given in a table; no preference was imposed. The observation resting on the use of the word anfus in this sūra and in al-Ḥujurāt was given as an observation about the word order.
  • Three explanations of the reason for the note wa'staghfir lahumu'llāh in 24/62 were given; no preference was imposed.
  • Two readings of the expression duʿāʾa'l-rasūl in 24/63, and two senses of the word fitna, were given; no preference was imposed.
  • The sūra's table of structure, its web of words, the count of the verse-endings, the logic of the blocks, the sequence of "holding back / opening", the weave of the eye, and the comparison with al-Ḥujurāt — all of these were recorded as my own reading and observation. The data they rest upon (the places of the words, the repetitions of roots, the text of the verse-endings) stand in the text and can be counted; the interpretations drawn from them are mine.
  • No claim resting on the counting of numbers or letters was used. The repetitions of roots and the count of the verse-endings were given not as a claim of hidden meaning but as an observation of style.
  • No wholesale ruling was set up about any ethnic, national or religious group. What the sūra describes are attributes; whoever bears that attribute is included in it.
  • No side was taken in any current political or social debate. This rule was stated again, in particular, in the discussions of 24/2, 24/30-31 and 24/55.
  • No fabricated transmission, ḥadīth or narration was used. Where I was not certain, language that plainly announces the uncertainty was used — "it is transmitted in the classical sources", "what the lexicographers record", "it is widely transmitted".

52 sections

  1. al-Nūr 24:1
  2. al-Nūr 24:2
  3. al-Nūr 24:3
  4. al-Nūr 24:4
  5. al-Nūr 24:5
  6. al-Nūr 24:6-7
  7. al-Nūr 24:8-9
  8. al-Nūr 24:10
  9. al-Nūr 24:11
  10. al-Nūr 24:12
  11. al-Nūr 24:13
  12. al-Nūr 24:14
  13. al-Nūr 24:15
  14. al-Nūr 24:16
  15. al-Nūr 24:17-18
  16. al-Nūr 24:19
  17. al-Nūr 24:20
  18. al-Nūr 24:21
  19. al-Nūr 24:22
  20. al-Nūr 24:23
  21. al-Nūr 24:24
  22. al-Nūr 24:25
  23. al-Nūr 24:26
  24. al-Nūr 24:27
  25. al-Nūr 24:28
  26. al-Nūr 24:29
  27. al-Nūr 24:30
  28. al-Nūr 24:31
  29. al-Nūr 24:32
  30. al-Nūr 24:33
  31. al-Nūr 24:34
  32. al-Nūr 24:35
  33. al-Nūr 24:36-38
  34. al-Nūr 24:39
  35. al-Nūr 24:40
  36. al-Nūr 24:41-42
  37. al-Nūr 24:43
  38. al-Nūr 24:44-45
  39. al-Nūr 24:46
  40. al-Nūr 24:47-50
  41. al-Nūr 24:51-52
  42. al-Nūr 24:53
  43. al-Nūr 24:54
  44. al-Nūr 24:55
  45. al-Nūr 24:56-57
  46. al-Nūr 24:58
  47. al-Nūr 24:59
  48. al-Nūr 24:60
  49. al-Nūr 24:61
  50. al-Nūr 24:62
  51. al-Nūr 24:63
  52. al-Nūr 24:64